en_tn/tn_ACT.tsv

1	Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
2	front:intro	mw28				0	Introduction to Acts Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the book of Acts The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7) The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31) The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24) Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5) The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20) Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31) Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part. What is the book of Acts about? The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.” Who wrote the book of Acts? The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke. Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts. Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What is the church? The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution. The kingdom of God The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) Part 3: Important Translation Issues Figurative usages in the book of Acts “arise/arising” Luke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs. “brothers” Luke often uses the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts “to the same” The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing. “in/to/into the temple” Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book. What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts? The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book. First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are: Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’” Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.” Acts 24:6–8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.” Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.” Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are: Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.” Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.” Acts 10:19, “three men.” Some versions read “two men” or “some men.” Acts 10:30, “Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”). Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.” Acts 15:17–18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	1:intro	vyg9				0	Acts 1 General Notes Structure and Formatting The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20. Special Concepts in this Chapter The Ascension This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]]) Baptism Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in 1:5. In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in 2:4. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God” Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in 1:3, he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse. Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Long sentence As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of 1:1 to the end of 1:3. ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. The details of the death of Judas There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death. It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it. But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in 1:18 that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you could let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. The 12 disciples There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts. All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known. Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in 1:13 instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
4	1:1	q9ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην	1	Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by the first account he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5	1:1	a000			ὦ Θεόφιλε	1	Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
6	1:1	ryj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θεόφιλε	1	Theophilus is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7	1:1	a001		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	Luke is using the word began to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
8	1:1	a002		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9	1:2	a003		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας	1	While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word day to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10	1:2	n435		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11	1:2	a424		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνελήμφθη	1	Luke is referring to Jesus being taken up into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12	1:3	a004			οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
13	1:3	dup3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν	1	This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14	1:3	a005		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	The word translated proofs describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15	1:3	yc16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων	1	While the antecedent of whom is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16	1:3	a006		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17	1:4	a007		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb depart. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
18	1:4	vb7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι	1	The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
19	1:4	sg4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Jesus is referring to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a promise to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
20	1:4	a009		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
21	1:4	tj6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου	1	In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
22	1:4	d3kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἠκούσατέ	1	Here, you is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In 1:6, “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether you is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
23	1:5	fnq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1	Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24	1:5	a075		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
25	1:5	dzj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26	1:5	a010		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας	1	Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
27	1:6	n9wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν	1	In the first instance, they describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, they refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in 1:8 apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
28	1:6	a011		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
29	1:6	f7uj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word kingdom, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
30	1:7	a012		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι	1	Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
31	1:7	y1fu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς	1	The words times and seasons could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
32	1:7	a013		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
33	1:7	a014		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word authority, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
34	1:8	ld4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες	1	Jesus is using the word translated and to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
35	1:8	a015		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δύναμιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word power, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
36	1:8	vb4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
37	1:9	e1q1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλεπόντων αὐτῶν	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of looking. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
38	1:9	l1cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπήρθη	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
39	1:9	ug58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	Luke is using the eyes of the apostles to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
40	1:10	enu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated heaven here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
41	1:10	a017		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο	1	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these two men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
42	1:10	a018		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
43	1:10	a019		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄνδρες δύο	1	These were actually angels. Luke calls them men because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
44	1:10	a020			ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς	1	In this context, the word white likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
45	1:11	a021		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἳ & εἶπαν	1	This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
46	1:11	a022		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs	οἳ & εἶπαν	1	If you retain the word they in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
47	1:11	gpg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
48	1:11	a024		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
49	1:11	a025		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες	1	The expression stand means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
50	1:11	a026		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν & ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν	1	In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated heaven likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
51	1:11	a027		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
52	1:11	cue7			ὃν τρόπον	1	Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
53	1:12	x2nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑπέστρεψαν	1	The word they refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
54	1:12	a028		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
55	1:12	a029		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	Olivet is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
56	1:12	a030		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	The expression having a journey refers to a distance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
57	1:12	p19g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	The journey of a Sabbath was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
58	1:13	vis2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτε εἰσῆλθον	1	The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
59	1:13	zt12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες	1	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression upper chamber describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
60	1:13	a032		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου	1	These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
61	1:13	a033		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάκωβος & Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας & Ἰακώβου	1	These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
62	1:13	a034		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς	1	Simon is the name of a man, and Zealot is another name by which he was known. (1) Zealot could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) Zealot could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
63	1:14	z6cf			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
64	1:14	a035		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γυναιξὶν	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in Luke 8:2–3 and 23:49. Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
65	1:14	a037		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
66	1:15	il8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
67	1:15	cup2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
68	1:15	a038		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
69	1:15	liz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
70	1:15	a039		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. As the General Introduction to Acts suggests, here and throughout the book, if you retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that it has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
71	1:15	tl5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι	1	Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
72	1:15	a040		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὄχλος ὀνομάτων	1	Luke is using the term names to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
73	1:15	a041			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
74	1:16	a042		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
75	1:16	a043		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
76	1:16	a045		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this scripture before his statement that it had to be fulfilled. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
77	1:16	i8tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
78	1:16	a046			προεῖπε	1	Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
79	1:16	f3um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ	1	Peter is using the word mouth to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in 1:20. Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
80	1:16	a048		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	Peter is using the act of guiding the ones arresting Jesus to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
81	1:17	q73y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Peter uses the word For to introduce the reason for a result that is described in 1:21–22, after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in 1:16. The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
82	1:17	a049		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
83	1:17	a050			κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	Peter is using the term numbered in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
84	1:17	a051		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
85	1:17	tmv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐν ἡμῖν	1	Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word us to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that us is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
86	1:17	a052		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in 1:18–19. The quotation resumes in 1:20. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
87	1:18	tmv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	μὲν οὖν	1	Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
88	1:18	dd58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὗτος	1	Luke is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
89	1:18	a053		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word unrighteousness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
90	1:18	w83j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	Luke is using the term unrighteousness to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
91	1:18	kg3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
92	1:18	a054			πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	The word headfirst describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
93	1:18	a055		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
94	1:19	a056			γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The verb form is not passive here, since known is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make it the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
95	1:19	a057		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
96	1:19	a058		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
97	1:19	mxf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἁκελδαμάχ	1	Akeldama is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, Field of Blood. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
98	1:20	mz13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
99	1:20	d7pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
100	1:20	ip5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
101	1:20	g30d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
102	1:20	crk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
103	1:20	hiul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, please make his habitation desolate, and please make no one dwell in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
104	1:20	mc45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
105	1:20	chq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	The word habitation likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
106	1:20	a059			τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	The word overseership refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in 1 Timothy 3:1. Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
107	1:20	uctm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May another take his overseership” or “Another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
108	1:20	jdsg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
109	1:20	elz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or “God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
110	1:21	t916		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
111	1:21	xz69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς	1	In the first instance of us, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of us, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
112	1:21	zuf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
113	1:22	qb8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word baptism, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
114	1:22	a061		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς	1	While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific day, Peter may be using the word day to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
115	1:22	a062		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀνελήμφθη & τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun he refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun his also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
116	1:22	yi3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
117	1:22	a063		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀφ’ ἡμῶν & σὺν ἡμῖν	1	When Peter says from us, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says with us, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
118	1:22	mrx7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἕνα τούτων	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective these as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
119	1:22	g3n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
120	1:23	lz7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔστησαν δύο	1	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
121	1:23	a064		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἔστησαν δύο	1	Luke is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
122	1:23	a065		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔστησαν δύο	1	When the believers stood up these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
123	1:23	a066		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρσαββᾶν & Ἰοῦστος	1	Joseph is the name of a man, and Barsabbas and Justus are two other names by which he was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. Justus is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
124	1:23	s1ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
125	1:23	a067		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαθθίαν	1	Matthias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
126	1:24	a068		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
127	1:24	a069		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	Together the words praying and said indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
128	1:24	zd1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
129	1:24	a070			σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
130	1:24	se6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
131	1:24	a071		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	σὺ Κύριε	1	The word you is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
132	1:24	a072		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα	1	The person who is praying is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
133	1:25	mg47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς	1	The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word apostleship identifies what kind of ministry this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
134	1:25	ryv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας	1	The expression turned aside means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
135	1:25	tx6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον	1	This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
136	1:26	a073		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
137	1:26	r84c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun they refers to the believers and the pronoun them refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun them and if your language marks the dual form, them would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
138	1:26	a074		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	The term lots describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
139	1:26	w4ph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν	1	The word fell means “selected.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
140	1:26	fk4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνκατεψηφίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
141	2:intro	x8fr				0	Acts 2 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31. Special Concepts in this Chapter Pentecost The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years. Tongues Luke uses the Greek word “tongues” to mean two different things in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. For clarity, ULT translates the use in 2:3 as “tongues” and the use in 2:4 as “languages.” Last days In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) The prophecy of Joel In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]]) Baptize In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1–11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) Wonders and signs These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43. Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “You killed” (2:23) The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this. Long sentences There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. Poetry The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]].
142	2:1	i4sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
143	2:1	a076		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
144	2:1	a425		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
145	2:1	i4sb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ	1	Here the word they refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
146	2:1	a077			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
147	2:2	qjc3			ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	The word translated heaven could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from heaven itself.
148	2:2	a078		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
149	2:2	jec5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	Luke speaks of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
150	2:2	a079		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	Luke speaks of this sound as if it filled the house. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
151	2:2	t4y4			ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	Luke may be using the word translated house in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
152	2:2	a080		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι	1	Luke may be using the term sitting to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
153	2:3	re3t			γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός	1	This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in Isaiah 5:24, for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
154	2:3	xtk4			διαμεριζόμεναι	1	This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
155	2:3	a081		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun they refers to the objects, and the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
156	2:3	a082		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	Luke is using the word sat to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
157	2:4	v7hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
158	2:4	a251		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
159	2:4	a083		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	Luke is using the word began to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
160	2:4	nr9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	The implication, as 2:6–11 makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
161	2:4	a084			καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	Here, giving has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
162	2:4	a085			καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	The word translated to speak out means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
163	2:5	dz1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
164	2:5	yft2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς	1	Luke is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
165	2:5	stq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	παντὸς ἔθνους	1	The word every is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
166	2:5	a086		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν	1	The expression under heaven is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
167	2:6	bpj7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεχύθη	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
168	2:6	u9hc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun them refers to the believers and the pronoun his refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
169	2:7	m8kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο & καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	The terms amazed and marveling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
170	2:7	a087		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	The expression were … amazed is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
171	2:7	a088		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
172	2:7	wnk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ & ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι	1	The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
173	2:8	hzm8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν?	1	The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
174	2:8	a090		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	The speakers are using the word translated And to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
175	2:8	a091		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of hearing. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
176	2:8	a092		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν	1	The speakers are using the words we and our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
177	2:8	wb5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	The speakers say that they were born in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
178	2:8	a093		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
179	2:9	f1ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάρθοι & Μῆδοι & Ἐλαμεῖται	1	These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
180	2:9	dm23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον & Ἀσίαν	1	These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
181	2:10	tmb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φρυγίαν & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον & Λιβύης	1	These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
182	2:11	w8jy			Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι	1	The term proselytes describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase both Jews and proselytes could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in 2:9–11. Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
183	2:11	jnp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κρῆτες & Ἄραβες	1	These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
184	2:11	a097		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The speakers are using the adjective great as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
185	2:12	el2f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο	1	The words amazed and perplexed mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
186	2:12	a098		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο & λέγοντες	1	These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
187	2:12	a099		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι	1	The expression want to be is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What does this mean?” or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
188	2:13	a100		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
189	2:13	fg59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
190	2:13	jj1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	γλεύκους	1	This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
191	2:14	k5hr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ	1	Peter stood to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
192	2:14	c919		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἕνδεκα	1	Luke is using the adjective eleven as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
193	2:14	d9tb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς	1	The idiom raised up his voice means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
194	2:14	a102		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
195	2:14	a103		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
196	2:14	a104		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες	1	This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
197	2:14	ei5j			τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
198	2:14	hal2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you” or “this should be known to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
199	2:14	brjc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective known expresses the result of action by a different agent (you), so you can use an active form with that agent as the implied subject. Alternate translation: “know this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
200	2:14	a105		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Peter uses the word translated and to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
201	2:14	qp16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου	1	Peter is using the term words to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term ears to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
202	2:15	a106		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Peter says for in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
203	2:15	a107		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1	The demonstrative pronoun these refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
204	2:15	a108		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	Peter says for in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
205	2:15	a109			ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
206	2:15	h28q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
207	2:15	a110		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
208	2:16	f9hz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
209	2:16	ktw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
210	2:17	a111		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	The material in 2:17–21 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase God says to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
211	2:17	a112		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
212	2:17	ijl8			καὶ ἔσται	1	Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
213	2:17	a113			ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις	1	See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
214	2:17	u2d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	God says that he will pour out his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
215	2:17	a114		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	God refers to flesh to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
216	2:17	a115		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται	1	If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
217	2:17	a116		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὑμῶν	-1	If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of your as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
218	2:17	a117		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ νεανίσκοι & οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	God speaks separately of sons and daughters in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between young and old. So the word men could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
219	2:18	uwd7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
220	2:18	nd34			ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου	1	If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
221	2:18	a118		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	Here, days means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
222	2:18	wz2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ & ἐπὶ & ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	See how you translated this in 2:17. Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
223	2:19	a119		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ δώσω	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
224	2:19	a120			δώσω τέρατα & καὶ σημεῖα	1	Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
225	2:19	a121			ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω	1	Since God specifies in the next verse that these wonders will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated heaven likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
226	2:19	p5zi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ	1	Here the possessive form describes vapor that looks smoky or that has smoke in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
227	2:20	ylv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
228	2:20	a6yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
229	2:20	a122		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	God is speaking as if he would change the sun into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
230	2:20	a123		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word darkness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
231	2:20	a124		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
232	2:20	a125		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
233	2:20	f34k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	God is speaking as if he would change the moon into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
234	2:20	swb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	The words great and remarkable mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
235	2:20	lc4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
236	2:20	a126		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
237	2:21	a127		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
238	2:21	a128			καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς	1	Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
239	2:21	vql5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
240	2:21	a129		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται	1	The expression call on means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
241	2:21	a130		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
242	2:21	a131		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
243	2:21	a132		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
244	2:21	a133		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	σωθήσεται	1	This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
245	2:22	sa78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
246	2:22	g6vj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	Peter is using the term words to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
247	2:22	f2t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
248	2:22	a135		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις	1	The terms mighty works, wonders, and signs mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
249	2:23	a136		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
250	2:23	i6un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον	1	The term translated given up is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
251	2:23	s38b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words counsel and foreknowledge, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
252	2:23	a137		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word determined is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
253	2:23	f5kn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνείλατε	1	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
254	2:23	e38a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων	1	Here, hand refers to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
255	2:23	a138		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀνόμων	1	Peter is using the adjective lawless as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
256	2:23	f6kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνόμων	1	By lawless, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
257	2:23	a197			προσπήξαντες	1	This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
258	2:24	a140			ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
259	2:24	ei37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
260	2:24	s8j3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	Peter speaks of the agonies of death as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
261	2:24	a141		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	Peter uses the possessive form to describe death as something that is characterized by agonies. Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
262	2:24	a142		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why this was not possible. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
263	2:24	ykq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
264	2:24	vuf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Peter speaks of death as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
265	2:25	dd5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from Psalm 16:8–11.) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
266	2:25	a143		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	The pronoun him refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns I and my are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
267	2:25	a144		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Peter uses the word For to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
268	2:25	a145		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Δαυεὶδ & λέγει εἰς αὐτόν	1	Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what David says in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
269	2:25	n2ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιόν μου	1	The phrase before me, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
270	2:25	tqak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ παντός	1	The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
271	2:25	a146		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	Here the adjective right is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
272	2:25	l6xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	In this context, to be at someone’s right side means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
273	2:25	a147		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	Here, moved means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
274	2:25	s4yp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
275	2:26	a148		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
276	2:26	z8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου	1	Here, the heart represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
277	2:26	a149		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου	1	Here, the tongue represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
278	2:26	zz6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	Here, flesh means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
279	2:26	a150		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word hope, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
280	2:26	a151		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	The Messiah is speaking as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
281	2:26	a152		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what hope the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
282	2:27	m3ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
283	2:27	a153		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than nor in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
284	2:27	whi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις & οὐδὲ δώσεις & σου	1	The words you and your are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in 1:24 in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
285	2:27	a154		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	The Messiah says my soul to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
286	2:27	a156		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
287	2:27	rld3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
288	2:27	a157		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	Here the word see is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
289	2:27	l5cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
290	2:28	a158		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
291	2:28	a159		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	ἐγνώρισάς & πληρώσεις & σου	1	The words you and your are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in 1:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
292	2:28	xhi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς	1	The Messiah speaks of life as if it consisted of paths that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word known refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
293	2:28	ej5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης	1	The Messiah speaks as if he were a container that God could fill with gladness. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
294	2:28	y7gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	Here, the word face represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
295	2:28	a161		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
296	2:29	pv1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
297	2:29	ps7c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
298	2:29	wh97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ	1	A patriarch is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
299	2:29	vtc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐτάφη	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
300	2:29	a162		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης	1	Peter is using the word day to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
301	2:30	a163		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Peter uses the word Therefore to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
302	2:30	a164		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προφήτης & ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς	1	Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
303	2:30	x11q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is using the word loins to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word fruit in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
304	2:30	hq71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	When Peter says that God promised to set one of David’s descendants upon his throne, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
305	2:31	a165		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐλάλησεν & ἐνκατελείφθη & αὐτοῦ	1	The first instance of he refers to David, and the second instance of he and the pronoun his refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
306	2:31	a166		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
307	2:31	tn4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
308	2:31	a167		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Christ is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
309	2:31	a169		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Here the word see is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
310	2:31	a170		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Peter is using the word flesh to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
311	2:31	up5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
312	2:32	udn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
313	2:32	kw6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	By we, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
314	2:33	a171		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word Therefore. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
315	2:33	kij2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
316	2:33	c9mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
317	2:33	a172		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
318	2:33	a173		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου	1	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
319	2:33	a174		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
320	2:33	c1dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξέχεεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
321	2:33	wsg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξέχεεν	1	Peter says that Jesus has poured out the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in 2:17, to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
322	2:34	m7fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγει & αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	The material in 2:34–35 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David (Psalm 110:1), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
323	2:34	i8wu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	The Lord means God here, and my Lord means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
324	2:34	a175		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	Here the adjective right is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
325	2:34	kvn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
326	2:35	nf1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	The psalm says that God would make the Messiah’s enemies a stool for his feet to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
327	2:35	a176		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
328	2:36	a177		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
329	2:36	msqt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
330	2:36	tgbf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
331	2:36	pnp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
332	2:37	s85q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀκούσαντες & κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
333	2:37	xan1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Here the word they refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
334	2:37	w1ma			κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of heart. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
335	2:37	l15x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Luke is speaking. The people were not literally pierced in the heart by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
336	2:37	zls6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
337	2:37	a178		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
338	2:37	a179		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τί ποιήσωμεν	1	The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
339	2:38	a180		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	μετανοήσατε & βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν & λήμψεσθε	1	The words you and your are plural, you will receive is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative Repent is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative be baptized is singular, since the subject is each. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
340	2:38	cmb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθήτω	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
341	2:38	geb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express your allegiance to Jesus Christ as your Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
342	2:38	a181		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
343	2:39	a182		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in 2:33. Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
344	2:39	a183		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	Peter showed the people in 2:17 that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
345	2:39	a184		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	Peter could also be using the word children in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
346	2:39	v8vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν	1	Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in 11:18. So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
347	2:39	a185		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	By the Lord our God, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
348	2:39	a186		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἂν προσκαλέσηται	1	Peter is using the word call in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
349	2:40	a187		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἑτέροις & λόγοις πλείοσιν	1	Luke is using the term words to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
350	2:40	v6ip		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς	1	Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word urged tells in what way Peter testified further about faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
351	2:40	a188		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σώθητε	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
352	2:40	wtd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	The implication is that God is going to punish this perverse generation. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
353	2:40	a189		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	The word perverse describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this generation rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
354	2:41	k1kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	οὖν	1	Luke uses the word Therefore to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
355	2:41	r9qz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	Here, received means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
356	2:41	a190		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
357	2:41	kz64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
358	2:41	sv5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ψυχαὶ	1	Luke is using one part of these people, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
359	2:41	a47f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθησαν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
360	2:42	a191		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἦσαν & προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words teaching and fellowship, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
361	2:42	gc59		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	Luke could be using the word breaking to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
362	2:42	a192		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	By the breaking of bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
363	2:43	a193		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this fear as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
364	2:43	gi9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	Luke is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
365	2:43	a194		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	Luke says every as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
366	2:43	ys3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο	1	Since Luke says that these things happened through the apostles, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and wonders and signs the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
367	2:43	q6dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
368	2:44	u8qk			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
369	2:44	jy2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά	1	Luke may be saying all as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
370	2:45	h8tn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον	1	The words properties and possessions mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
371	2:45	f74s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ	1	Here the pronoun they refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun them refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
372	2:45	n9hi			πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
373	2:46	in43			καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
374	2:46	a427		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
375	2:46	q1ge		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 2:42. There were two possible meanings there, but here breaking bread seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
376	2:46	i2yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	Here, the heart represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
377	2:46	a195		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words exultation and sincerity, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
378	2:47	z6ig		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν	1	Luke says the whole people as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
379	2:47	kc42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοὺς σῳζομένους	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
380	2:47	a196			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
381	3:intro	hpd9				0	Acts 3 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter The covenant God made with Abraham This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “Servant” Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in Chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead. “You killed” (3:15) For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
382	3:1	b5rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
383	3:1	br7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
384	3:1	a198			τὴν ἐνάτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
385	3:1	a199		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
386	3:2	f227		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form was being carried. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
387	3:2	u6nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	καί τις ἀνὴρ	1	In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
388	3:2	j68t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the womb of his mother when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
389	3:2	a200		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν λεγομένην	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
390	3:2	a201		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ὡραίαν	1	Beautiful is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
391	3:2	a202		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
392	3:3	a203		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν	1	The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him alms (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
393	3:4	xq4u			ἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν	1	This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
394	3:4	e3c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of us in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
395	3:6	x6bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον	1	Peter is referring to money by association with the way that silver and gold were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
396	3:6	zi9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι	1	What happens next in the story shows that by what I have, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
397	3:6	t2vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
398	3:6	a205		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	περιπάτει	1	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
399	3:7	ec6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	In this verse, the pronoun he refers to Peter, while the pronouns him and his refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
400	3:7	a206		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
401	3:8	a207		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
402	3:8	abc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun he refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun them refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
403	3:8	q13i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	Luke is using the word began to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
404	3:8	zp7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
405	3:9	a208		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
406	3:10	zy7h			ἐπεγίνωσκον & αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ & καθήμενος	1	Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
407	3:10	p2zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ	1	This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
408	3:10	a209		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
409	3:10	j6zf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	The words wonder and amazement mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
410	3:10	a210		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	Luke is speaking as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
411	3:10	a211		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wonder and amazement, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
412	3:11	a212		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
413	3:11	rk1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος	1	This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
414	3:11	rj43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ καλουμένῃ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
415	3:12	ndi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
416	3:12	uyg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ	1	Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
417	3:12	j6ld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν?	1	Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
418	3:12	g4y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἰδίᾳ	1	By us and our own, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of us and our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
419	3:12	mwd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ	1	Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with or. The term godliness describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the power that he and John have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
420	3:13	q8q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ & Ἰσαὰκ & Ἰακώβ	1	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
421	3:13	a213		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
422	3:13	kmqw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	The term fathers could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could state “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
423	3:13	a214			τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν	1	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
424	3:13	a215			παρεδώκατε	1	Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
425	3:13	cp1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου	1	Here the phrase before the face of means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
426	3:13	yy96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds one to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
427	3:14	a217		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
428	3:14	a218		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	Peter is using both the adjective Holy and the adjective Righteous to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds One to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
429	3:14	a219		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	The terms Holy and Righteous mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
430	3:14	a220		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
431	3:14	s6qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
432	3:15	a221		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκτείνατε	1	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
433	3:15	ljn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν & Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς	1	Peter is using the expression the Originator of Life as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
434	3:15	a222		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
435	3:15	jwb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
436	3:15	a223		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡμεῖς	1	If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun we here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
437	3:16	abc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
438	3:16	qt8w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun his refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
439	3:16	a224		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is using the name of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
440	3:16	abc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	The first instance of the pronoun him refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
441	3:16	a225		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην	1	Peter is speaking of faith as if it were a living thing that could have given complete health to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
442	3:17	v45t			καὶ νῦν	1	Peter uses the expression And now to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
443	3:17	a226		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Peter addresses the people as his brothers because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
444	3:17	x62k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε	1	Peter likely means that the people acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
445	3:17	a228		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
446	3:18	gcc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως	1	Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God fulfilled prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
447	3:18	ms6d			διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, the prophets, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of mouth. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
448	3:18	z3l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	Peter is using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
449	3:18	a229		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	Peter is using the word all as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
450	3:19	cw18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψατε	1	Peter is speaking of his listeners as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
451	3:19	zm6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
452	3:19	a230		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically wiped away when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
453	3:20	a231		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Peter is speaking of these times as if they could actively come to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
454	3:20	x3ca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word refreshment, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
455	3:20	f2wm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Peter is using the term face to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
456	3:20	h3nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀποστείλῃ	1	Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
457	3:20	yzr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
458	3:21	vgn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι	1	Peter is speaking of heaven as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
459	3:21	x2f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word restoration, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
460	3:21	a2m8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπ’ αἰῶνος	1	The expression from the age means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
461	3:21	a12i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	Peter is using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
462	3:22	a232		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
463	3:22	a249		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
464	3:22	a250		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
465	3:22	v5nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει	1	Here the expression raise up does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in 2:24 and 2:32. In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
466	3:22	t8di		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	Moses is using the term brothers to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
467	3:22	a234		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
468	3:22	a235		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
469	3:23	a236		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
470	3:23	t8a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
471	3:23	a237		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
472	3:23	a238		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις	1	Moses is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
473	3:23	a239		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου	1	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
474	3:24	u6x3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες & οἱ προφῆται	1	Here the phrase all the prophets is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in 3:18. It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets announced these days. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you could translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
475	3:24	xp9h			ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς	1	Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
476	3:24	m9pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	Peter is using the word days to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
477	3:24	a241		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
478	3:25	rh2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Peter is using the word sons in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
479	3:25	a242		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	οἱ υἱοὶ	1	Although the term sons is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
480	3:25	a243		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	The figurative sense of sons as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
481	3:25	a244		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
482	3:25	a245		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	Here, fathers means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
483	3:25	wid4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
484	3:25	mad5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	The term seed means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
485	3:25	a246		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	As the apostle Paul notes in Galatians 3:16, God used the singular form of the word seed when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
486	3:25	a247		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
487	3:25	g31m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	Here, families refers to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
488	3:26	b7tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν	1	The expression raised up has the same meaning here as in 3:22. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
489	3:26	z5q6			τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ	1	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in 3:13. Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
490	3:26	x8ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	Here, turning someone from something means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:19. Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
491	3:26	a248		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wickedness, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
492	4:intro	pv3a				0	Acts 4 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26. Special Concepts in this Chapter Unity The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help. “Signs and wonders” This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11) The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “no other name” (4:12) “There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
493	4:1	abc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	λαλούντων & αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
494	4:1	ew3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
495	4:1	m74s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
496	4:1	d3tv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
497	4:2	abc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
498	4:2	mg5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows the resurrection to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
499	4:2	np5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
500	4:3	a254		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
501	4:3	a255		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The pronoun they refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun them refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
502	4:3	zla7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The expression laid hands on means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
503	4:3	a256		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word custody, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
504	4:3	h5f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη	1	The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in 4:5–6, would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
505	4:4	a257		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
506	4:4	a258		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
507	4:4	bm1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν	1	Luke is not using the word men in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate men as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
508	4:4	qd8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε	1	The word translated became could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
509	4:5	lw2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
510	4:5	cdj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in 4:15. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
511	4:5	j6p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
512	4:5	i9tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συναχθῆναι	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
513	4:6	a259		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας	1	Luke describes Annas as the high priest, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
514	4:6	l44n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἅννας & Καϊάφας & Ἰωάννης & Ἀλέξανδρος	1	These are the names of four men. The John mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
515	4:6	a260			ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
516	4:7	abc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο	1	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns their and they refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
517	4:7	t1eq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς?	1	The words power and name (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
518	4:7	jc21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι	1	Here, name refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
519	4:7	a261		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς	1	Since the council members are speaking to two men, you would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as them in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
520	4:8	su5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
521	4:8	a262		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	Luke is speaking of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
522	4:8	a263		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι	1	Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the elders, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to Exodus 24:1, that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
523	4:8	a264		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ	1	Here, the people means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
524	4:9	pq85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται	1	Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, a good deed to a sick man. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
525	4:9	je6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς & ἀνακρινόμεθα	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
526	4:9	b92n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος σέσωσται	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
527	4:10	q9ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
528	4:10	snd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective known expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
529	4:10	j3px		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πᾶσιν ὑμῖν	1	The pronoun you refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
530	4:10	khn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι	1	Here, name refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
531	4:10	a265		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	See how you translated this in 2:22 and 3:6. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
532	4:10	a266		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε	1	It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
533	4:10	jyj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
534	4:10	a267		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
535	4:11	nwg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1	The pronoun He refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
536	4:11	w195		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	Peter is quoting from Psalm 118:22, and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
537	4:11	c1bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
538	4:11	f1nx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	The phrase the head of the corner is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
539	4:12	a268		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
540	4:12	tq3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word salvation, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
541	4:12	l66w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
542	4:12	iz7k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον & ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
543	4:12	jm25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 2:5. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
544	4:12	a269		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
545	4:12	gg8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
546	4:12	tdw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	Peter is using the word we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
547	4:13	r6d6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	θεωροῦντες	1	Luke is using the word seeing to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
548	4:13	t6kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου	1	Here the abstract noun boldness refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
549	4:13	qaa5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καταλαβόμενοι	1	The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
550	4:13	xn39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν	1	Here the pronoun they refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun them. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
551	4:13	erv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται	1	The words uneducated and ordinary mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
552	4:14	h3cy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
553	4:14	a270		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον	1	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
554	4:14	fq4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν	1	The implication is that anything the council members said in opposition would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
555	4:15	ql31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	The pronoun them refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
556	4:15	a272		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
557	4:16	p4g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις?	1	This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As 4:21 indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
558	4:16	jn12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
559	4:16	nh5s			γνωστὸν σημεῖον	1	Here the word sign has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
560	4:17	a273		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
561	4:17	f71l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	By it, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
562	4:17	a274			ἐπὶ πλεῖον	1	Alternate translation: “any further”
563	4:17	w52j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
564	4:17	a275		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
565	4:17	a276		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	Here, men has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
566	4:18	a277		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
567	4:18	a278		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν	1	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
568	4:18	a279		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν	1	The words speak and teach mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
569	4:18	a280		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
570	4:19	a281		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
571	4:19	a282		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in 4:19–20. (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in 4:8–12. Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
572	4:19	jf1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
573	4:19	a283		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
574	4:20	a284		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Peter and John are using the word For to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
575	4:20	hf3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν	1	Peter and John are using the word we to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
576	4:20	a285		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ δυνάμεθα & ἡμεῖς & μὴ λαλεῖν	1	You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
577	4:21	y5y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
578	4:21	z2bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τὸν λαόν	1	The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
579	4:21	jbl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν	1	Here, all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
580	4:22	gy8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
581	4:22	a286		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
582	4:22	ju4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	Luke is speaking as if the healing had happened on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
583	4:22	a287		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	Luke is using the possessive form to describe a sign that consisted of a healing. The word sign has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
584	4:23	a288		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπολυθέντες	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
585	4:23	a289		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
586	4:23	j2cx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἰδίους	1	The phrase their own people refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
587	4:23	a290		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	As Peter does in 4:8, here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
588	4:24	j3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἦραν	1	The phrase having heard refers to the other believers, but the pronoun they seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus (4:29). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
589	4:24	a291			ἦραν φωνὴν	1	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
590	4:24	zu28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦραν φωνὴν	1	The expression they raised their voice is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
591	4:24	a292			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
592	4:24	a293		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal	σὺ	1	The word you is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in 4:25–30. You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
593	4:24	a160		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
594	4:24	a294			τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	The believers are using the word translated heaven in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
595	4:25	ka83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών	1	The word mouth refers to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
596	4:25	vc5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, Psalm 2:1–2. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
597	4:25	a295		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	The believers are using the word our to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
598	4:25	kat6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς	1	Here, father means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
599	4:25	a296			παιδός	1	The believers are using the word servant here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in 3:13 and 3:26.
600	4:25	a297		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
601	4:25	a298		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
602	4:25	f1x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
603	4:25	w622		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κενά	1	The phrase useless things implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
604	4:26	fb5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in 4:25. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
605	4:26	w2by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
606	4:26	w64b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς	1	The expression took their stand describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
607	4:26	a299		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
608	4:26	a300			ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
609	4:26	yv19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Κυρίου & τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	Here the word Lord refers to God and the word Christ refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
610	4:27	b1g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθησαν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
611	4:27	nuc1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	The phrase this city refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
612	4:27	ca33			παῖδά	1	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13 and 3:26. Alternate translation: “Messiah”
613	4:27	a303		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃν ἔχρισας	1	In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
614	4:28	yz7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	Here, hand means God’s power and counsel means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
615	4:28	a304		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	The words hand and counsel, joined by and, are expressing a single idea. The word hand, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his counsel, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
616	4:28	a305		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	The believers are speaking of God’s hand and his counsel (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had predetermined what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
617	4:29	b38z			καὶ τὰ νῦν	1	The believers use the expression And now to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
618	4:29	t5qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν	1	The phrase look upon is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
619	4:29	a306		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τοῖς δούλοις σου	1	The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
620	4:29	zh7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον σου	1	The believers are using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
621	4:29	a307		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
622	4:30	x9r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι	1	Here the hand represents God’s power. To stretch out the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
623	4:30	a308		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
624	4:30	t5uw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	Here, name refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
625	4:30	txb5			τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13, 3:26, and 4:27. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
626	4:31	a309		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
627	4:31	a310		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
628	4:31	x9b3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσαλεύθη	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
629	4:31	ps3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
630	4:31	a311		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
631	4:31	a312		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
632	4:31	a313		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word boldness, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
633	4:32	a314		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information in 4:32–37 that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word Now with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
634	4:32	xu3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	Here the word heart seems to represent the emotions and the word soul seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
635	4:32	a315		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	The terms heart and soul mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
636	4:32	a316			τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
637	4:32	zyp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά	1	The word everything may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:44. Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
638	4:33	a317		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word resurrection, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
639	4:33	a318		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	The pronoun them refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in 4:32. It does not refer just to the apostles, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
640	4:33	d8dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word grace, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
641	4:34	a331		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of For. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
642	4:34	a319		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Luke uses the word For in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
643	4:34	a320		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	Luke uses the word for in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
644	4:34	gw3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον	1	The phrase as many as is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
645	4:34	l938		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
646	4:35	a321		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	The expression laying it at the feet indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they received onto the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
647	4:35	vv4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
648	4:35	a322		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεδίδετο	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
649	4:35	ps4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word need, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
650	4:36	uc2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἰωσὴφ δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
651	4:36	a323		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρναβᾶς	1	Joseph and Barnabas are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
652	4:36	a324		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
653	4:36	a325		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form being translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
654	4:36	a326		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when translated from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
655	4:36	nr4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	The expression Son of describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
656	4:36	a327		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word Encouragement, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
657	4:37	a330			ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:32. Alternate translation: “that he owned”
658	4:37	gtv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
659	5:intro	k2uh				0	Acts 5 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3) No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1–10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers. Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Long sentences Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
660	5:1	v27a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
661	5:1	ysl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
662	5:1	a332		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
663	5:1	a333		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαπφείρῃ	1	Sapphira is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
664	5:2	a334		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could state why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
665	5:2	xm1t			συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι & ἔθηκεν	1	It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
666	5:2	dy8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν	1	This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in 4:37. Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
667	5:3	grr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου?	1	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
668	5:3	pqd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	Peter is speaking of the heart of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had filled. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
669	5:3	a335		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
670	5:3	a426		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου	1	Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
671	5:3	zz5u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
672	5:3	a336		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
673	5:4	vu7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν?	1	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
674	5:4	vi8w			ἔμενεν	1	Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
675	5:4	k7nc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πραθὲν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
676	5:4	a337		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	The pronoun it refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
677	5:4	a338		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
678	5:4	i5dw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
679	5:4	a339		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	Here, the heart represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
680	5:4	a340		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	Peter speaks of this thing, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had placed it in his heart, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
681	5:4	a341		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	Ananaias actually has lied to men, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
682	5:4	a342		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
683	5:5	a343		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκούων δὲ & τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	Luke is using the term words to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
684	5:5	cc5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	The word translated expired means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
685	5:5	a344		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
686	5:5	a345		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	Luke describes this fear as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
687	5:6	a346		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	Here the expression rising up means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
688	5:6	a347		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ νεώτεροι	1	This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
689	5:6	a348		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
690	5:7	a349		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
691	5:7	ry54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun his refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
692	5:7	k3c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ γεγονὸς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
693	5:8	a350			ἀπεκρίθη & πρὸς αὐτὴν	1	The word translated said means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
694	5:8	a351		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ἀπέδοσθε	1	Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
695	5:8	bcf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοσούτου & ναί, τοσούτου	1	This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
696	5:9	v7sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου?	1	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
697	5:9	hc22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
698	5:9	w1lb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμῖν & σου & σε	1	The word you in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word your and the word you in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
699	5:9	pg1e			πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Here the word test means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
700	5:9	a352		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in 5:3 and 5:4. Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
701	5:9	a353		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες	1	Peter says Behold to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
702	5:9	xj1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	Peter is referring to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their feet represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The door represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
703	5:9	a354		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
704	5:9	a355		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε	1	The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will carry her out to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
705	5:10	s7en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	The word translated expired means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
706	5:10	a356		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
707	5:10	nwb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
708	5:10	a357		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ νεανίσκοι	1	See how you translated this expression in 5:6. However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these young men were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
709	5:11	vym8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
710	5:11	a358		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα	1	Luke describes this fear as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:5. Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
711	5:12	c2e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce background information in 5:12–16 that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
712	5:12	sri8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ	1	Luke is using the hands of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
713	5:12	ux3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
714	5:12	aud2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦσαν & πάντες	1	The pronoun they refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
715	5:12	a359			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
716	5:12	k99k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος	1	This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11, which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
717	5:13	a360		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν & λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς	1	The expression the others refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
718	5:13	a361		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why no unbelievers dared to join them. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus (4:18), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in 5:28, the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
719	5:14	a362		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke says the Lord to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
720	5:14	m9wx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:41. Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
721	5:14	oxni		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
722	5:15	a364		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Luke says so that to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in 5:12, that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of 5:12–15 could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in 5:12. However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in 5:12 about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
723	5:15	l9bs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκφέρειν	1	The pronoun they refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
724	5:15	a365		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
725	5:15	a366		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων	1	The words cots and mats mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
726	5:15	y2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
727	5:15	a367			ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
728	5:16	a368		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀσθενεῖς	1	See how you translated the expression the sick in 5:15. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
729	5:16	fu1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
730	5:16	lyc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
731	5:16	a369		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	It does not appear that all is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat all as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
732	5:17	x2ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
733	5:17	f9ye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	The high priest and these Sadducees were first filled with jealousy and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
734	5:17	pc45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form were filled. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
735	5:17	a370		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the expression rising up means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
736	5:17	a371		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων	1	The phrase all those with him means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the Sadducees. As a note to 4:1 explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
737	5:17	a372		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word jealousy, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
738	5:17	a373		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	Luke is speaking as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy filled. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
739	5:18	j58p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	The expression laid hands on means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
740	5:18	a374		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
741	5:19	wd37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξαγαγών & αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
742	5:20	qm16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the angel says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
743	5:20	z1x3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	The angel is using the term words to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
744	5:20	a375			τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
745	5:21	a376		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀκούσαντες	1	Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
746	5:21	df1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
747	5:21	l7uf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον	1	The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
748	5:21	a377		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
749	5:21	a378		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παραγενόμενος	1	This does not mean that the high priest and his allies arrived in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
750	5:21	a379		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	The phrase even all the elders of the sons of Israel clarifies the name Sanhedrin by describing it membership. Luke is using the word elders here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in 4:5. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
751	5:21	a380		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	Here, sons means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
752	5:21	li6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον	1	Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
753	5:23	a381		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form shut, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
754	5:23	a382		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word security, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
755	5:23	a383		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνοίξαντες	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of opened. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
756	5:23	ld7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν	1	By no one, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
757	5:24	k5g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	Luke is using the term words to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
758	5:24	baw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	περὶ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun them does not refer to the apostles but to the words that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
759	5:24	p78m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο	1	The expression what this might become refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
760	5:25	a384		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	This person says Behold to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
761	5:25	a8dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἔθεσθε	1	Here the word you refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
762	5:25	c1am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the messenger says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
763	5:26	e24h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν	1	The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun them refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
764	5:27	iq7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
765	5:28	a385			παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν	1	For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
766	5:28	f7pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμῖν & πεπληρώκατε & ὑμῶν & βούλεσθε	1	In this verse the words you and your refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
767	5:28	g2hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	The high priest is using the term name to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
768	5:28	a386		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε	1	The high priest says behold to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
769	5:28	j4kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν	1	The high priest is speaking of the city of Jerusalem as if it were a container that the apostles had filled with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
770	5:28	a387		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	The high priest is speaking as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
771	5:28	a388		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	By us, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
772	5:28	ym1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα	1	The high priest is using the term blood to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
773	5:28	a389		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1	The phrase this man refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
774	5:29	a390		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
775	5:29	di9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
776	5:29	a391		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
777	5:30	a392		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
778	5:30	kwsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Although the term fathers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
779	5:30	r7av		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
780	5:30	a393		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	The word you is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
781	5:30	a394		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
782	5:30	pu5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	The word translated as tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
783	5:30	a395		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	In some languages the word hung would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
784	5:31	a396		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
785	5:31	a397		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
786	5:31	uh2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	God placing Jesus at his right side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
787	5:31	mr1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words repentance and forgiveness, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
788	5:31	q1il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	Ἰσραὴλ	1	Peter is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
789	5:32	a398		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word we to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
790	5:32	a399		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
791	5:32	yml6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
792	5:33	abx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	The pronoun they refers to the council members and the pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
793	5:34	i2rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις & Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
794	5:34	a401		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γαμαλιήλ	1	Gamaliel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
795	5:34	a402		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
796	5:34	fpr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
797	5:34	a403		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
798	5:34	a404		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Here, rising up means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
799	5:34	xk6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	Your language may require you to specify the object of commanded. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
800	5:34	a405		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	βραχὺ	1	Luke is using the adjective little as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
801	5:35	a406		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	τε	1	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
802	5:35	a407		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
803	5:35	ae1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν	1	Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could state that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as 5:33 says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
804	5:36	a408		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρὸ & τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν	1	Gamaliel is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
805	5:36	a409		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θευδᾶς	1	Theudas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
806	5:36	uaj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	In this context, rose up means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
807	5:36	b3nl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν	1	In this context, the expression somebody means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
808	5:36	a410		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
809	5:36	ie3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνῃρέθη	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
810	5:36	juz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
811	5:36	a411		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διελύθησαν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
812	5:36	rzg5			καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν	1	Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
813	5:37	f33y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	μετὰ τοῦτον	1	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
814	5:37	a412		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος	1	The word Judas is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in 1:13 and 1:16. (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) Galilean is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in 1:11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
815	5:37	a413		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	As in 5:36, rose up here means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
816	5:37	p56f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς	1	Gamaliel is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
817	5:37	kz4s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	Here, drew away is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
818	5:37	a414		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	κἀκεῖνος	1	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
819	5:37	a415		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	If your language would not use the passive form were persuaded, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
820	5:37	a416		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεσκορπίσθησαν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
821	5:38	i4bw			καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν	1	Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
822	5:38	a417		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Gamaliel is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
823	5:38	wz89			ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς	1	When Gamaliel tells the council to keep away from these men, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as 5:33 says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
824	5:38	zh1d			ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο	1	Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
825	5:38	a418		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Gamaliel is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts from men here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
826	5:38	uql8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλυθήσεται	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
827	5:39	a419		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were from God. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
828	5:39	j819		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	Here the pronoun it refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
829	5:39	a420		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μήποτε	1	It may be helpful to state the implications of the word lest explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
830	5:39	a421		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
831	5:39	a422		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὑρεθῆτε	1	The expression be found means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
832	5:39	cyp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπείσθησαν & αὐτῷ	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
833	5:40	z31c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
834	5:40	p6lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν	1	The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
835	5:40	fca9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	The Sanhedrin members are using the term name to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
836	5:41	a423		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	Luke is using the word face to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
837	5:41	cv8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηξιώθησαν	1	If your language would not use the passive form had been considered, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
838	5:41	lk82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	Here, the Name means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
839	5:42	jj94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	τε	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
840	5:42	kyp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
841	5:42	x424		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι	1	Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
842	6:intro	z5r5				0	Acts 6 General Notes Structure and Formatting Acts 6:7 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book. Special Concepts in this Chapter The distribution to the widows The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “His face was like the face of an angel” No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
843	6:1	f8br		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
844	6:1	cg5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Luke is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
845	6:1	e7vb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν	1	Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
846	6:1	s4qy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
847	6:1	rde8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word service, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
848	6:2	kwvo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word So to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
849	6:2	n5r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ δώδεκα	1	Luke is using the adjective Twelve as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
850	6:2	is74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	οἱ δώδεκα	1	Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
851	6:2	jm17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The apostles are speaking as if they would walk away from the word of God and leave it behind them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
852	6:2	w9re		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
853	6:2	fwk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διακονεῖν τραπέζαις	1	To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
854	6:3	lcyx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
855	6:3	p1yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους	1	The expression being attested is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
856	6:3	mgid		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
857	6:3	pxe5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
858	6:3	i27a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης	1	When the apostles say that they will appoint these men over the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
859	6:4	b3bj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου	1	The apostles are using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
860	6:5	wh9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους	1	Luke is using the word before to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
861	6:5	jayc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
862	6:5	ajq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Στέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον	1	These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
863	6:5	vsyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
864	6:5	yqsj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
865	6:5	cg5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀντιοχέα	1	The name Antiochian describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
866	6:6	lvaj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
867	6:6	wu1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	The apostles placed their hands on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
868	6:7	x48w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
869	6:7	wu4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were growing. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
870	6:7	ueie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
871	6:7	jg8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	Luke speaks generally of the faith (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests became obedient to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
872	6:7	qq3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word faith, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
873	6:8	et2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Στέφανος δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
874	6:8	pzr0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that grace and power were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
875	6:8	h8sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Luke may be using the two words grace and power together to express a single idea. The word grace would describe the character of the power that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
876	6:8	xscq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words grace and power, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
877	6:8	m0zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα	1	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
878	6:9	d74m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέστησαν	1	Here the expression rose up means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
879	6:9	nei0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
880	6:9	k88n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	The word Freedmen probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
881	6:9	e7b0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας	1	The word Cyrenians is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word Alexandrians is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words Cilicia and Asia are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
882	6:10	v5ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι	1	In this context, the expression stand against means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
883	6:10	fnb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	Luke may be using the two words wisdom and Spirit together to express a single idea. The word Spirit would describe the source and character of the wisdom that Stephen was displaying. The word Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
884	6:10	psha		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word wisdom, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
885	6:11	ren5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας	1	The word instigated means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
886	6:11	s2cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀκηκόαμεν	1	The men are using the word We to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
887	6:11	x747		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα	1	The men are using the term words to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
888	6:12	tqk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνεκίνησάν	1	In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in 6:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
889	6:12	l251		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	Luke says that Stephen’s opponents stirred up these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
890	6:13	zv6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ παύεται λαλῶν	1	If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb stop. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
891	6:13	ju6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαλῶν ῥήματα	1	The men are using the term words to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
892	6:13	o3j2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου	1	The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a holy place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
893	6:14	uok4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν τόπον τοῦτον	1	By this place, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
894	6:14	vak4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς	1	The phrase handed down is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
895	6:15	k8rw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου	1	Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like the face of an angel. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
896	7:intro	p9h4				0	Acts 7 General Notes Structure and Formatting This chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in 6:13–14. Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin. (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50. A note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses. It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter. Special Concepts in this Chapter “Stephen said” Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them. “Full of the Holy Spirit” The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say. Foreshadowing When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in 7:58, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Implied information Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” (Acts 7:9), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Metonymy Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Important Textual issues in this Chapter “a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46) In 7:46, some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Background knowledge The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes. Reference of “our” and “you” Throughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.
897	7:1	hy9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἀρχιερεύς	1	Connecting Statement: Luke assumes that his readers will know that the high priest was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
898	7:2	abc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ ἔφη	1	The pronoun he refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
899	7:2	zbq0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	The phrase Men, brothers and fathers is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
900	7:2	v5si		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	Stephen is using the word brothers to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word fathers to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
901	7:2	kfep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun glory with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
902	7:2	n09p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης	1	Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in 6:11 that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the God of glory acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
903	7:2	pt4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word our to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
904	7:2	w1ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ	1	Stephen is using the term father to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
905	7:3	uksj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
906	7:3	kgef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, while the pronoun him refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
907	7:4	pfg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατῴκησεν & αὐτοῦ & μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν	1	The pronouns his and him and the first instance of the word he refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word he refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
908	7:4	pfg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	The word you is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listening to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
909	7:5	tnsm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐπηγγείλατο & αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & αὐτόν & οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ	1	The pronouns him and his and the third instance of he refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of he refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
910	7:5	ax1j			οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
911	7:5	qff6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός	1	This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
912	7:5	u6iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	The term seed means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
913	7:5	j09v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun possession with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
914	7:6	orw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
915	7:6	tn6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
916	7:6	jymv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν	1	Stephen is using the singular word seed to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun stranger and the singular pronoun him. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could state “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun them. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
917	7:7	k8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
918	7:7	f7fw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος	1	Here, nation refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
919	7:7	q7y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν	1	As in 7:6, Stephen is using the singular pronoun him because he is using the singular word seed to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
920	7:8	iwfx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐγέννησεν	1	The first instance of the pronoun he refers to God, while the word him and the second instance of the pronoun he refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
921	7:8	mwc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς	1	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
922	7:8	g67f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ	1	These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
923	7:8	ams1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
924	7:8	gaww		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word patriarchs to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
925	7:9	n981		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	οἱ πατριάρχαι	1	Here the word patriarchs refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
926	7:9	tik7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
927	7:9	w1is		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	When Stephen says that God was with Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
928	7:10	kxgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	In these phrases the word he refers to God and the words him and his refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
929	7:10	bfoo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns favor and wisdom with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
930	7:10	vpir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1	Here the phrase before Pharaoh may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
931	7:10	s5vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐναντίον Φαραὼ	1	The phrase before Pharaoh could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
932	7:10	nycs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	In these phrases the words he and his refer to Pharaoh and the word him refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
933	7:10	yr7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
934	7:10	pb4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	The word household refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
935	7:11	p42j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἦλθεν & λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1	Here, Stephen speaks of famine and tribulation as if they came to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
936	7:11	frd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of tribulation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
937	7:11	p37v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
938	7:12	pia8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
939	7:12	cvhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον	1	By first, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
940	7:12	mbg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
941	7:13	a5f3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	Stephen is using the adjective second as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds time to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
942	7:13	ce2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
943	7:13	m37e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
944	7:13	jxk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ	1	The phrase became known is not actually a passive form in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
945	7:14	aam5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἀποστείλας & Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ	1	Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
946	7:14	wl32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε	1	Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
947	7:15	zasp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Stephen says that Jacob went down because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
948	7:15	w2sm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they died as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
949	7:15	fe56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
950	7:16	slg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
951	7:16	la8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τιμῆς ἀργυρίου	1	Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used silver as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
952	7:17	tuq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	In your language it may be helpful to say that the people increased and multiplied before saying that the time of the promise approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
953	7:17	kh8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	Stephen is speaking of this time as if it were a person and could have approached on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
954	7:17	tlh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ	1	Stephen is referring to the promise that he described in 7:7. God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
955	7:17	s2oe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	Stephen is using the two words increased and multiplied together to express a single idea. The word multiplied tells in what way the people increased. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
956	7:18	whe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	When Stephen says that this next king arose, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
957	7:18	g2wq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	The word Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
958	7:18	e2y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ	1	Stephen is not saying that this king did not know Joseph personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, Joseph refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
959	7:19	qwbi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	He refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
960	7:19	z312		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
961	7:19	ug6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Although the term fathers is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
962	7:19	rh3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by exposed he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
963	7:19	n2vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι	1	Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the verb keep alive, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
964	7:20	nib6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ	1	Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
965	7:20	q66s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	Here Stephen introduces Moses into his story. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
966	7:20	cz9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
967	7:20	cd5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ	1	This could mean: (1) that Moses was beautiful in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very beautiful. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
968	7:20	pnb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνετράφη & ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
969	7:21	w3iu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	Moses was exposed because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
970	7:21	el3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν	1	This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus 2:1–10.) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
971	7:22	c9nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
972	7:22	att9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	Stephen says all as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
973	7:22	m3dm			δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
974	7:23	o4cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
975	7:23	b9gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
976	7:23	ckxj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	The expression it came up on his heart means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
977	7:23	fj9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	Here, heart is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
978	7:23	x493		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	Stephen is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
979	7:23	i4ko		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	Although the terms brothers and sons are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
980	7:24	l4zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Egyptian who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
981	7:24	y3yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
982	7:24	r2e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
983	7:25	hrsh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Stephen is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
984	7:25	f6sn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
985	7:25	nhb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Here, hand refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
986	7:26	t2vc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτοῖς	1	It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
987	7:26	qyc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὺς & ἐστε & ἀδικεῖτε	1	Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of them and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
988	7:26	mpc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
989	7:26	kyde		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
990	7:26	zzt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
991	7:26	z5g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Moses is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
992	7:26	k1ku		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1	Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
993	7:27	xef7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The word him refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
994	7:27	iq30		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
995	7:27	q2r4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1	The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
996	7:27	wtq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν	1	In this context, the words ruler and judge mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
997	7:27	t1hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	The man is using the word our to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
998	7:28	vow8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding do you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
999	7:28	hk1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1	The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1000	7:28	qfxh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1001	7:28	jxka			ὃν τρόπον	1	Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
1002	7:29	l149		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔφυγεν & Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1003	7:29	rbhm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	Stephen is using the term word to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1004	7:29	q8qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1005	7:30	zx1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1006	7:30	qci0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1007	7:30	veft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος	1	The word appeared does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1008	7:30	f7yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1009	7:31	q6w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses admired the sight because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1010	7:31	uk7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου	1	Stephen is speaking of the voice of the Lord as if it were a person and that it came on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1011	7:32	b26o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1012	7:33	bpml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν & αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1013	7:33	x7cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1014	7:33	rxnj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1015	7:33	xl9p			τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of sandals. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
1016	7:33	clk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1017	7:34	l0au		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον.	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1018	7:34	yz7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδὼν, εἶδον	1	Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb seen is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1019	7:34	x5bg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τοῦ λαοῦ μου	1	God uses the possessive word my to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1020	7:34	j32c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς	1	God describes himself as having come down from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means that he is taking action to rescue them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1021	7:34	atdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	3	God is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1022	7:34	sq8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	νῦν δεῦρο	1	God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1023	7:34	x34c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says let me send you to Egypt. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1024	7:35-38	x4p2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν	1	Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says This Moses, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
1025	7:35	nv5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in 7:27. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1026	7:35	vuqy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?	1	See how you translated this rhetorical question in 7:27. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1027	7:35	oic6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν	1	See how you translated the combination of ruler and judge in 7:27. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1028	7:35	vp7e			λυτρωτὴν	1	In this context, the word translated redeemer refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”
1029	7:35	yjz9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου	1	Here, hand is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1030	7:35	abc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ	1	See how you translated the word appeared in 7:30. Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1031	7:36	gz9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1032	7:36	n75x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ	1	Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, the Red Sea, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1033	7:37	k710		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1034	7:37	vykp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ	1	Stephen is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1035	7:37	b4sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει & ὡς ἐμέ	1	Here, the expression raise up describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1036	7:37	j2rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	Stephen is using the word brothers to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1037	7:38	fd25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος	1	This is the one refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1038	7:38	z1z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα	1	It might be more natural to put the information about Mount Sinai next to the information about Moses receiving living words. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1039	7:38	vdnz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο	1	This second instance of who in the verse refers to Moses, not to the fathers. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1040	7:38	y2zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα	1	It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the words that he received. Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1041	7:38	p3xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγια ζῶντα	1	Stephen is using the term words to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1042	7:38	w2gs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λόγια ζῶντα	1	Stephen is using the term living to describe God’s words as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1043	7:39	ab0s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	The word whom refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1044	7:39	mvz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπώσαντο	1	Stephen is speaking to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1045	7:39	z3ze		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	Here, hearts is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1046	7:40	l8u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ.	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1047	7:40	kb3o			εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών	1	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”
1048	7:40	a68q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ	1	It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1049	7:41	ux1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this image of a calf was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as the idol later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1050	7:41	v6tx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	Stephen is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1051	7:41	hjp0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	The pronoun they refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1052	7:41	hh77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	Stephen describes what he also calls the calf and the idol as the works of their hands by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1053	7:42	d3dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς	1	Stephen is speaking as if God had physically turned away. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1054	7:42	u7lx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Here, the word host means “army,” and the word heaven means “sky.” Stephen is speaking of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1055	7:42	ya6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1056	7:42	f314		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1057	7:42	w38i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1	This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1058	7:42	o5ly		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1	The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding did you? Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1059	7:42	gd1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1	Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of Israel that they did not really worship Him in the wilderness with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1060	7:42	q9rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	μὴ & προσηνέγκατέ	1	You is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (house) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you could use singular you in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1061	7:42	tck0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	σφάγια καὶ θυσίας	1	In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (slain beasts) and those that are bloodless (offerings), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1062	7:42	j4q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἶκος Ἰσραήλ	1	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1063	7:43	zek5			καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος.	1	The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
1064	7:43	h20h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καὶ	1	And at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, 7:42: “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me … , did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1065	7:43	q85n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	ἀνελάβετε & μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς	1	The term took up indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term remove in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1066	7:43	gxh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ἀνελάβετε & ὑμῶν & ἐποιήσατε & ὑμᾶς	1	As in 7:42, you is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse your is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you could use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1067	7:43	im7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ	1	The tabernacle of Molech was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1068	7:43	cq47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν	1	The Israelites were not carrying around an actual star, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1069	7:43	gm4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε	1	The word images refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1070	7:43	zgq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	3	Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated and to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1071	7:43	rrn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος	1	This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1072	7:44	fs4q			Connecting Statement:	0	Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
1073	7:44	hfmx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ	1	Stephen is not saying that the tabernacle was with the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built according to the pattern that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1074	7:44	m9gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου	1	Stephen calls this tent the tabernacle of the testimony by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1075	7:44	fk06		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει	1	It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1076	7:44	masq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1077	7:44	avqh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the pattern for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1078	7:45	uqca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	The pronoun which refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
1079	7:45	qjov			διαδεξάμενοι	1	The phrase having received … in turn translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
1080	7:45	n2sc			εἰσήγαγον & μετὰ Ἰησοῦ	1	When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle with Joshua, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
1081	7:45	e3gu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσήγαγον	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1082	7:45	eww5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Stephen is using the term nations to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1083	7:45	spm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	Stephen is using the word face to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1084	7:45	zjlj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ	1	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1085	7:45	wot8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ	1	Stephen is using the term days to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1086	7:46	k9vh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὑρεῖν	1	Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1087	7:46	x4kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The pronoun who refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
1088	7:46	ykio		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1089	7:46	yl80		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὑρεῖν	1	Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this dwelling. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1090	7:46	w3cu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκήνωμα	1	The word dwelling refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1091	7:46	in7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1	Some ancient manuscripts read “the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1092	7:46	fsmp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Jacob means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1093	7:47	k54c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αὐτῷ οἶκον	1	Stephen is using the word house to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1094	7:47	dlk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ οἶκον	1	The pronoun him refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1095	7:48	wuce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ὁ Ὕψιστος	1	This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1096	7:48	fwvu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	χειροποιήτοις	1	Stephen is using the adjective made with hands (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds houses to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1097	7:48	c822		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	Stephen is using the word hand, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1098	7:48	ota0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	χειροποιήτοις	1	The word houses means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1099	7:48	d4fh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by the prophet, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1100	7:49	oyax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1101	7:49	k2vn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	Speaking through Isaiah, God describes Heaven as his throne and the earth as his footstool. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1102	7:49	i4u3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	God is using the two parts of creation, Heaven and earth, to mean all of creation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1103	7:49	wc9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?	1	God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1104	7:49	rqr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1105	7:49	mshp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ποῖον οἶκον	1	The word house means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1106	7:49	vjaq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of rest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1107	7:50	hqjr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1108	7:50	rfk1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1109	7:50	jlg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	God is using one part of himself, his hand, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1110	7:50	gzw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα πάντα	1	The phrase all these things refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1111	7:51	umq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen is using the exclamatory word O to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative O. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1112	7:51	yxe3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ	1	Stephen is using the adjective stiff-necked as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1113	7:51	vn7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκληροτράχηλοι	1	Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1114	7:51	zp55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen speaks of the Sanhedrin members’ heart and ears as uncircumcised by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1115	7:51	esfc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen is using one part of a person, the heart, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1116	7:51	jslb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	Stephen is using one part of a person, the ears, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1117	7:51	zgon		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε	1	The word always is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1118	7:51	w164		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμεῖς	1	The words you and your are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1119	7:51	d2v8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1120	7:52	x7kf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1	Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1121	7:52	eiw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1	Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1122	7:52	q8wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦ Δικαίου	1	Stephen is using the adjective Righteous as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds One to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1123	7:52	agd9			οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε	1	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”
1124	7:53	axhl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1	The pronoun who refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1125	7:53	t92q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἵτινες ἐλάβετε	1	The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive the law themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1126	7:53	euw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων	1	Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in 7:38 that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1127	7:54	ef2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀκούοντες & ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1128	7:54	u4l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	Here, the expression they were cut to their hearts is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1129	7:54	ae9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1130	7:55	dlux		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1131	7:55	ntp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν	1	The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1132	7:55	bl2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δόξαν Θεοῦ	1	The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1133	7:55	zpry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1134	7:55	vamz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1135	7:55	vyz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” at the right of God. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1136	7:56	gzvv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Stephen is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1137	7:56	p0jg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ	1	Stephen is speaking of the heavens being opened to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1138	7:56	aqp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	The title Son of Man is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1139	7:56	imoa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you translated the nominal adjective right in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1140	7:56	cr19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase at the right of God in 7:55. Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1141	7:56	rvwp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus standing in 7:55. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1142	7:57	p4cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν	1	The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1143	7:57	wtwk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1144	7:57	hm0q			κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one voice, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
1145	7:57	t287			ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
1146	7:58	ks1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	Luke is likely speaking when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members throwing Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1147	7:58	teas		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ μάρτυρες	1	These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in 6:13. According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1148	7:58	ryrh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου	1	The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1149	7:58	wy7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὰ ἱμάτια	1	These outer garments were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1150	7:58	sx2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας	1	The expression at the feet means on the ground in front of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1151	7:59	fxhz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase calling out tells how Stephen was saying what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1152	7:59	k2el		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1153	7:60	u86q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς & τὰ γόνατα	1	Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1154	7:60	hi24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1155	7:60	dfjs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1156	7:60	tvf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb hold … against. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1157	7:60	r9vi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says he fell asleep. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1158	8:intro	q9d9				0	Acts 8 General Notes Structure and Formatting The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32–33. The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in Chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.” Special Concepts in this Chapter Receiving the Holy Spirit In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15–19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers. Proclaimed This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
1159	8:1	ez88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in 8:3 and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1160	8:1	i1tc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1161	8:1	vc8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	Here, day is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1162	8:1	xp25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντες & διεσπάρησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1163	8:1	u5pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες & διεσπάρησαν	1	The word all is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1164	8:1	k5a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	The implication is that the apostles remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1165	8:1-2	tp9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	It may be helpful to your readers to move the parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1–2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1166	8:2	sjc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον	1	The word translated carried away means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1167	8:3	yd2i			κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους	1	Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
1168	8:3	w6vk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	Luke may mean houses where Christians met, as described in 2:46, and he means men and women who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1169	8:4	n52l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & διασπαρέντες	1	Luke is using the participle having been scattered, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1170	8:4	ymy5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & διασπαρέντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. See how you translated it in 8:1. Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1171	8:4	su6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in 4:4. Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated proclaiming here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1172	8:5	gz5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθὼν	1	Luke speaks of Philip going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1173	8:5	f45b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1174	8:5	pk1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν Χριστόν	1	Luke is using the name Christ by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1175	8:6	cnt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ὄχλοι	1	Luke implicitly means the crowds in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1176	8:6	jyvw			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	Alternate translation: “all together”
1177	8:6	tt0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου	1	Luke is using the participle being spoken, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1178	8:6	g0ft		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1179	8:6	wm83			τὰ σημεῖα	1	Here the word signs has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”
1180	8:7	un6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο	1	As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had unclean spirits being the subject of the sentence to the unclean spirits themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people to such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1181	8:7	pehe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἐχόντων	1	Luke is using the participle having, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term those to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1182	8:7	xb2n			ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα	1	Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
1183	8:7	nz7y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ	1	This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1184	8:7	v8uj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in 4:10. Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1185	8:7	imbh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι	1	Luke is using the participle paralyzed as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1186	8:7	anq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1187	8:8	s8bm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1188	8:8	z5z3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	The phrase that city refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1189	8:8	r0nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1190	8:9	jm7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων	1	Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1191	8:9	bed1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ & τις ὀνόματι Σίμων	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1192	8:9	cx7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σίμων	1	Simon is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in 1:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1193	8:10	mvcm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	The phrase to whom refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1194	8:10	evt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες	1	Luke is using the word all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1195	8:10	h51l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	Luke is using the adjectives little and great as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1196	8:10	ibl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1197	8:10	h5ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1	The demonstrative pronoun This stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1198	8:10	j3d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη	1	The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1199	8:10	yw5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ καλουμένη	1	If your language does not use the passive form called, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1200	8:11	pxj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ	1	This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1201	8:12	h1hg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπίστευσαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1202	8:12	zwoj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1203	8:12	zjh5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the name of Jesus represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title Christ indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1204	8:12	jg1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Since Jesus inaugurated the kingdom of God when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1205	8:12	vsy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1206	8:13	k2th		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν	1	Luke uses the word himself to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1207	8:13	bayg			ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ	1	Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”
1208	8:13	v91t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1209	8:13	rnr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας	1	The word that ULT translates as works here is the same word that it translates as “power” in 8:10. It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that works of power that are truly great are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1210	8:13	d4yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις	1	The terms signs and works mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1211	8:14	s7lr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1212	8:14	lk9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1213	8:14	uwxo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν	1	If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1214	8:14	ju21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ Σαμάρεια	1	Luke is using the word Samaria by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1215	8:14	e682		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1216	8:15	af1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun who stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1217	8:15	hd1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	οἵτινες	1	Since the pronoun who stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1218	8:15	hk1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καταβάντες	1	Luke speaks of Philip having come down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1219	8:15	bun9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	καταβάντες	1	Your language may say “gone” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1220	8:16	d2z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1	Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1221	8:16	l4ez		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1222	8:16	qmjp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1223	8:16	bpzz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐδέπω & ἦν & ἐπιπεπτωκός	1	The pronoun he stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1224	8:16	rn3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here, the name of the Lord Jesus represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1225	8:16	m1nw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1226	8:17	bsll		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον	1	The first instance of the pronoun they stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun them and the second instance of they stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1227	8:17	bldf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ἐπετίθεσαν	1	Since this instance of the pronoun they stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in 8:18 and “they” and “the ones” in 8:25. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1228	8:17	q7gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	Peter and John laying their hands on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1229	8:18	rh79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1230	8:19	fbw9			δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον	1	Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
1231	8:20	df1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1232	8:20	y4ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἀργύριόν	1	Peter is referring to money by association with the way that silver was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1233	8:20	gh12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Peter is referring to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it the gift of God. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1234	8:21	p2ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	The terms part and share mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1235	8:21	ufk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σοι	1	The phrase to you represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1236	8:21	xbh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα	1	Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1237	8:21	p9v4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This could mean: (1) that Simon’s heart is not right in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1238	8:22	sa6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of wickedness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1239	8:22	ppk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Here, the heart represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1240	8:22	pe2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Peter is using the conditional word if to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
1241	8:22	lq4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1242	8:23	tf3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	The gall plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1243	8:23	kpu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	Peter is using the gall plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1244	8:23	d3v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας	1	Peter is describing bitterness as if it were made of gall or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1245	8:23	j696		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας	1	Peter speaks of the bond of unrighteousness as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1246	8:24	n5cw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς & εἰρήκατε	1	Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as 8:18 describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, You and you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1247	8:24	v2wy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1248	8:24	hwc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1	Simon is stating the pronoun You, which is already implied in the verb pray, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1249	8:24	u1a4			ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
1250	8:24	sk5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1251	8:25	nzvg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	οὖν	1	Luke is using the word translated Then to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1252	8:25	p3rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	The ones Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1253	8:25	uz15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες	1	Luke is using the participles having testified and having spoken, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1254	8:25	ww9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1255	8:25	eu66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν	1	The term villages refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1256	8:26	mbj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1257	8:26	w1nk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνάστηθι	1	Here the word arise means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1258	8:26	le2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν	1	The angel speaks of the road going down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1259	8:26	a18y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος	1	This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1260	8:27	s0yn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη	1	As in the previous verse, the word arising means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1261	8:27	xy7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἰδοὺ	1	Luke is using the word behold to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1262	8:27	zkc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1263	8:27	i5zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ	1	This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1264	8:27	s1uf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης	1	While the word eunuch describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1265	8:27	t5t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κανδάκης	1	Kandake was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1266	8:27	nm48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς	1	Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was over the treasure of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1267	8:27	v8q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1268	8:27	uk32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὃς ἐληλύθει	1	Your language may say “gone” rather than come in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1269	8:28	d3kv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τοῦ ἅρματος	1	Here and in 8:29 and 8:38, the term chariot probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1270	8:28	bx2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν	1	Luke is using the phrase the prophet Isaiah to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1271	8:28	n40c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνεγίνωσκεν	1	Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as 8:30 explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1272	8:29	llh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ	1	The Spirit means that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1273	8:30	ffh7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην	1	Luke is using the phrase Isaiah the prophet to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1274	8:30	x98i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις	1	The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1275	8:31	r5g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με?	1	The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1276	8:31	zx9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσέν & τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1277	8:32	nd93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1	This a quotation from Isaiah 53:7–8. It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1278	8:32	bgk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1279	8:32	kh97		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤχθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1280	8:32	lu3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος	1	A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1281	8:32	k8sy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1	This means that the Messiah does not speak by association with the way a person would open his mouth in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1282	8:33	dwur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of humiliation and justice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1283	8:33	y2a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1284	8:33	k3uz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1285	8:33	ec09		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1286	8:33	yxxn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of generation, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1287	8:33	idk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1288	8:34	agq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1289	8:34	htb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δέομαί σου	1	The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1290	8:34	pa3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἑτέρου τινός	1	In this context, the pronoun other means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1291	8:35	j7xw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνοίξας & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ	1	By association with the way a person would be opening his mouth in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1292	8:35	uw21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης	1	By this scripture, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1293	8:35	xg4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	Luke is using the name Jesus by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1294	8:36	ip13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τι ὕδωρ & ὕδωρ	1	Luke and the official are using the word water to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1295	8:36	muz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι?	1	This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in 8:37 by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1296	8:36	wb9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	με βαπτισθῆναι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1297	8:37	ov75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ	1	As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1298	8:37	qj5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου	1	Here, the heart represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1299	8:37	djq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσει	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1300	8:37	e3uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1301	8:38	l8wl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα	1	Luke is using the term chariot by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1302	8:38	nn00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν	1	The pronoun he stands for Philip, and the pronoun him stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1303	8:39	xp52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	γὰρ	1	While the word translated for often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip anymore because he did not look for him but instead went on his way. Rather, the word for seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1304	8:40	r1x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1305	8:40	bbws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1306	8:40	arh5			διερχόμενος	1	Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
1307	8:40	zfn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τὰς πόλεις πάσας	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1308	8:40	yf7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἄζωτον & Καισάρειαν	1	Azotus and Caesarea are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1309	9:intro	jm6x				0	Acts 9 General Notes Structure and Formatting In 9:1, the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation. In 9:32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter. Acts 9:31 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book. Special Concepts in this Chapter “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus” The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community. “the church” Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word church in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter “the Lord” Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter What Saul saw when he met Jesus It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
1310	9:1	r4n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated But to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1311	9:1	anb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς	1	Luke is using the two words threat and murder together to express a single idea. The word murder tells what kind of threat Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1312	9:1	lrre		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐμπνέων	1	Luke is using the term breathing by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1313	9:2	wyfp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & εὕρῃ & ἀγάγῃ	1	The pronoun him refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun he refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1314	9:2	zu6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐπιστολὰς	1	See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these letters were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1315	9:2	v9lw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς	1	Luke is using the terms Damascus and synagogues by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1316	9:2	thuy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας	1	As the General Notes to this chapter explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1317	9:2	mma1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1318	9:2	grch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1319	9:2	a6z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1320	9:3	jf4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν & τῷ πορεύεσθαι	1	Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1321	9:3	by55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	Luke uses the phrase it happened that to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1322	9:3	dm6c			αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”
1323	9:3	gua8			ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
1324	9:4	y4u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1325	9:4	c9l4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1326	9:5	jaq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τίς εἶ, κύριε?	1	Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is Lord. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1327	9:5	abc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν & ὁ	1	The first instance of he stands for Saul, and the second instance of he stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1328	9:5	q8ge			εἶ & σὺ	1	Both occurrences of the word you here are singular.
1329	9:6	fbi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαληθήσεταί σοι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1330	9:8	puw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνεῳγμένων & τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1331	9:8	dgg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἰσήγαγον	1	The pronoun they stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in 9:8. Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1332	9:9	fhn6			ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων	1	Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
1333	9:9	t8uc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν	1	This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. 9:11 says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1334	9:10	j847		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας	1	Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1335	9:10	kgn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in 5:1 (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1336	9:10	vqh0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ὁ Κύριος	1	Here and throughout this chapter, the Lord is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1337	9:10	vl8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε	1	Behold, I is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1338	9:10	u3e1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε	1	Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve the Lord. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1339	9:11	mn24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	Here, the word arising means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1340	9:11	kopv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	If your language does not use the passive form called, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1341	9:11	pyr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	Straight is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1342	9:11	ie1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδα	1	Judas it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in 1:13, 1:16, and 5:37 for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1343	9:11	k3ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται	1	The Lord says behold to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1344	9:12	jk46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας	1	In this culture, laying hands on people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in 6:6 for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1345	9:13	quxn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀπὸ πολλῶν	1	Ananias is using the adjective many as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1346	9:13	sh2m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅσα κακὰ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evils, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1347	9:13	la9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Ananias is using the term saints by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1348	9:14	ptd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1349	9:14	gk5o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δῆσαι	1	Ananias is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1350	9:14	hi6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	Ananias is using the participle calling, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term ones to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1351	9:14	t3fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1352	9:14	ampz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	Here, the expression calling on means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1353	9:15	jmt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι	1	The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an instrument who is characterized by his choosing. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1354	9:15	gk29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1355	9:15	ndxu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι	1	The Lord describes Saul as an instrument or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1356	9:15	z5fj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	The Lord says that Saul will carry his name, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1357	9:15	h8vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1358	9:15	wh8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐθνῶν	1	The term nations refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in 4:25. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1359	9:15	bbfd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	βασιλέων	1	The Lord is using kings, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1360	9:15	uq9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱῶν & Ἰσραήλ	1	The Lord is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1361	9:16	kty3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1362	9:17	s8ms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1363	9:17	my6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	When Ananias laid his hands on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at 9:2 and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1364	9:17	q61x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σοι & ἤρχου & ἀναβλέψῃς	1	All of the occurrences of the word you in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1365	9:17	cah9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Brother is a figurative title that Ananias is using for Saul. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in 1:15 and 6:3. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in 3:17 and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1366	9:17	cxu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὁ ὀφθείς σοι	1	Ananias is using the participle having appeared, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1367	9:17	ptg0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ᾗ ἤρχου	1	Your language may say “coming” rather than going in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1368	9:17	a89q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use the passive form filled, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1369	9:17	x4ey		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Ananias is speaking as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1370	9:18	m1hx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	λεπίδες	1	It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the scales that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1371	9:18	efs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1372	9:19	rxfi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνισχύθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1373	9:20	rc49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The personal pronoun he refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
1374	9:20	w65r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1375	9:21	xid8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1376	9:21	a8j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἀκούοντες & ὁ πορθήσας & τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους	1	Luke is using the participles hearing, having destroyed, and calling on, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms ones and one to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1377	9:21	f4fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο, καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς?	1	The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers in Jerusalem and had come to Damascus to arrest the believers there. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name! And he come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1378	9:21	ctg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	By this name the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1379	9:21	l82i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	Here, the name of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1380	9:21	zuoi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	Here, calling on is an idiom. See how you translated it in 9:14. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1381	9:21	i512		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1382	9:21	pnrp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς	1	Like Ananias in 9:14, the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1383	9:22	r1np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός	1	Saul was not intentionally stirring up the Jews. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1384	9:23	cg9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1	As in 2:1 and 7:23, this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1385	9:23	nyh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί	1	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1386	9:23	g74c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1387	9:23	g6gw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτόν	1	The pronoun him refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1388	9:24	gnm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of But in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1389	9:24	lv62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1390	9:24	cy9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρετηροῦντο & τὰς πύλας & ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν	1	The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1391	9:24	b0gv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς πύλας	1	Luke is using the gates to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1392	9:24	aezc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς	1	Luke is using the two parts of a full day, day and night, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1393	9:25	lc8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	These disciples were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1394	9:26	e38m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1395	9:27	abca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	Βαρναβᾶς & ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ & ἐπαρρησιάσατο	1	The pronoun him refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun he refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to the Lord in the second instance. The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1396	9:27	n9f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. Saul had spoken boldly with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1397	9:28	cgb1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1398	9:28	m5rs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun he refers to Saul. The pronoun them refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1399	9:28	r6ok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος	1	This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1400	9:28	fbb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 9:27. Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1401	9:29	d7lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἑλληνιστάς	1	Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in 6:1. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
1402	9:29	lgqe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν	1	The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1403	9:30	uz9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1404	9:30	j4mt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	Luke uses the phrase brought him down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1405	9:30	aqn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1406	9:31	fh2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶχεν εἰρήνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1407	9:31	elq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could state “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1408	9:31	vx51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἰκοδομουμένη	1	Luke is speaking of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1409	9:31	j8c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here, journeying means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1410	9:31	z59s			πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord”
1411	9:31	hl24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	Luke is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as the one who was giving the church encouragement. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1412	9:32	w68g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1413	9:32	m9sg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	διὰ πάντων	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1414	9:32	ad7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθεῖν	1	Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1415	9:32	tckc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα	1	Luke says to come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1416	9:32	g5c4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λύδδα	1	Lydda is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1417	9:33	hzd7			εὗρεν & ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα	1	The word found does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
1418	9:33	jnc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν	1	Luke uses this sentence to introduce Aeneas as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1419	9:33	owf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Αἰνέαν	1	Aeneas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1420	9:33	uj5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1421	9:33	k7hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	The reason why Aeneas had been lying in a bed for eight years was that he was paralyzed. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1422	9:34	t13n			ἀνάστηθι	1	Arise in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.
1423	9:34	ff2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1	Peter says for yourself to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you could make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1424	9:34	khrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1	Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1425	9:35	wykn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	The pronoun him refers to Aeneas. The pronoun who refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1426	9:35	z3fp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1427	9:35	qkv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	Sharon is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1428	9:35	pf23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1	The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1429	9:35	x9yw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	Here, turned to the Lord means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1430	9:36	zgq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δέ	1	Luke uses the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1431	9:36	gwr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς	1	Tabitha was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and Dorcas was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1432	9:36	z8la		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λέγεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1433	9:36	q2rn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν	1	Luke speaks of Dorcas as if she were a container that was full of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1434	9:37	mg72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	The phrase in those days refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1435	9:37	y8sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λούσαντες & αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν	1	This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1436	9:37	znj4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ	1	This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1437	9:37	lbrl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὑπερῴῳ	1	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large, sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1438	9:38	qlp8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1439	9:38	pukn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	παρακαλοῦντες	1	Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, urging would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1440	9:39	k1se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς & Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς	1	Here the word arising means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1441	9:39	tdrr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	αὐτοῖς	1	This first instance of them in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of them would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
1442	9:39	me79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι	1	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1443	9:39	piu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς	1	It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these coats and garments to help these widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1444	9:39	y6q5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα	1	This may be a delicate way of speaking about Dorcas’s death, rather than saying “before she died.” Alternate translation, as in UST: “while she was still alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1445	9:40	yp2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα	1	Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1446	9:40	wr7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1	This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah restores you to life, so you can get up now” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
1447	9:40	k28m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι	1	Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1448	9:41	r7n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δοὺς & αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν	1	The implication is that Peter extended his hand to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1449	9:41	b73s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας	1	These saints and widows were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1450	9:41	ex8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἁγίους	1	Luke is using the term saints by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in 9:33. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1451	9:42	nda9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1452	9:43	k9ik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1453	9:43	qar2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	βυρσεῖ	1	A tanner is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1454	10:intro	ym7z				0	Acts 10 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–2 give background information about Cornelius. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence at the start of v. 2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) In verse 9, the story shifts away from Cornelius and tells how God prepared Peter to preach the gospel to the Gentiles. In verse 24, the story brings Peter and Cornelius together. The long sentence in verses 36–38 can be broken up into several sentences, as in the UST. Special Concepts in this Chapter Jews visiting with Gentiles The Jews believed that they would become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against this, wanting to keep Jews from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that Jewish people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Baptism and the Holy Spirit Those who were listening to Peter received the Holy Spirit even as he was speaking to them. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could believe the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
1455	10:1	wtb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1456	10:1	h6zu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κορνήλιος	1	Cornelius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1457	10:1	x476		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἑκατοντάρχης	1	A centurion was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1458	10:1	abcd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1459	10:1	h2a4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	Σπείρης	1	A regiment was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your language that you can use for a unit of about this size. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1460	10:1	e88y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰταλικῆς	1	Italian is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1461	10:2	s6rh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	The word devout and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1462	10:2	rz4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel, attended the synagogue, prayed at regular times, and supported the needs of the Jewish community. Luke may be using the expression in this way and assuming that his readers will recognize it. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1463	10:2	abce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that the people refers to Jewish people who were in need. Alternate translation: “to Jewish people in need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1464	10:2	imrx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διὰ παντός	1	The phrase through all is an ellipsis for “through all times.” See how you translated it in 2:25. Alternate translation: “always” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1465	10:2	w2kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός	1	The phrase through all, meaning “at all times,” is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “often” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1466	10:3	up3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during his afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1467	10:3	ttsl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1468	10:3	z5ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1469	10:4	abcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun he stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun him stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1470	10:4	bd2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τί ἐστιν, κύριε	1	Cornelius uses the respectful title lord because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in 9:5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1471	10:4	abcg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun he stands for the angel, and the pronoun him stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1472	10:4	p5ml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	A memorial offering was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1473	10:4	xpa1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, before means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1474	10:5	h33i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1475	10:6	hou9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ξενίζεται παρά	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1476	10:6	bw0q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	βυρσεῖ	1	See how you translated the term tanner in 9:43. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1477	10:7	g6lq			ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ	1	Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”
1478	10:7	yg7g			εὐσεβῆ	1	The adjective devout describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”
1479	10:8	pcg2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἅπαντα	1	By everything, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1480	10:9	ey9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων	1	The demonstrative pronoun those refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1481	10:9	tu7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1482	10:9	r6l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1483	10:10	im7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις	1	Luke speaks of this vision as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1484	10:11	n4hi			θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw”
1485	10:11	u9u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	If your language does not use the passive form opened, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1486	10:11	jh1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθιέμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1487	10:12	fdt3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντα τὰ	1	The word all is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1488	10:12	ua3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	From Peter’s response in 10:14, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1489	10:13	a2z4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Luke speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1490	10:13	zmeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστάς	1	Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1491	10:14	z7r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μηδαμῶς	1	Not at all is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1492	10:14	ewlu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of word never and the negative terms common and unclean. Alternate translation: “I have only ever eaten things that are holy and clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1493	10:14	p0bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1494	10:14	a2jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “common and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1495	10:15	as42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	φωνὴ πάλιν & πρὸς αὐτόν	1	The implied verb here is came, and so Luke is speaking once again of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1496	10:15	xs5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1497	10:15	st9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	The voice is adding the pronoun you for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1498	10:16	rlr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1499	10:16	ej9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1500	10:17	d4zi			ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν	1	Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”
1501	10:17	n6da		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1502	10:17	cg9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κορνηλίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Cornelius had sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1503	10:17	e62m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα	1	The implication is that the house of Simon the tanner had a wall around it and that there was a gate in the wall that people could use to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1504	10:18	qe9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1505	10:18	r91o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ξενίζεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1506	10:19	iqx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς	1	The Spirit is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1507	10:19	va39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἄνδρες τρεῖς	1	Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1508	10:20	ndju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1509	10:20	ym1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατάβηθι	1	The implication is that Peter is to go down from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1510	10:20	wx4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1511	10:20	j3iy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲν διακρινόμενος	1	This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “without worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1512	10:22	rva1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	οἱ & εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ.	1	If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1513	10:22	i4zh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & εἶπαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1514	10:22	ue5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ & εἶπαν	1	One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1515	10:22	wvl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	The word righteous and the phrase fearing God mean similar things. (In this context, the word fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1516	10:22	hrta		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in 10:2. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1517	10:22	hihl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1518	10:22	gv91		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Luke says whole as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1519	10:22	e15o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1	The messengers are using the term words to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1520	10:23	shs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν	1	The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1521	10:23	ycoi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the word arising means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1522	10:23	t7cz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1523	10:24	c3s6			τῇ & ἐπαύριον	1	The next day means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
1524	10:25	b4pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας	1	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Cornelius did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1525	10:26	s7n5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι	1	Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1526	10:27	f9x6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν	1	The pronoun him refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun he refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1527	10:27	kdva		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὑρίσκει	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1528	10:27	twp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνεληλυθότας πολλούς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1529	10:28	iyx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ	1	This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1530	10:28	k3we		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀλλοφύλῳ	1	Here, the term foreigner refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1531	10:28	ztt0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1	Although the term man is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1532	10:28	tl2h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1533	10:29	x0p4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μεταπεμφθείς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1534	10:29	x0v3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	μετεπέμψασθέ	1	The word you is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1535	10:30	mqv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου	1	Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1536	10:30	na4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας	1	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or Four days ago. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1537	10:30	pkhh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ταύτης τῆς ὥρας	1	Cornelius is using the term hour to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1538	10:30	x4m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	Cornelius is using the adjective ninth as a noun. ULT adds hour to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in 10:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1539	10:30	u1es		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in 10:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1540	10:30	p73u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1541	10:30	yy6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1542	10:30	oicx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ	1	Cornelius is using the term behold to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this man appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1543	10:30	g485		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνὴρ	1	Luke says in 10:3 that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him a man here because the angel appeared to him in human form. you could state that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1544	10:31	twnu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])Q
1545	10:31	uep3			φησί	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
1546	10:31	heh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1547	10:31	s6nz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The word remembered does not imply that God had forgotten about these alms. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in 10:4. Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1548	10:31	xd0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον	1	Here the word before is being used. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1549	10:32	jjnn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1550	10:32	ci31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1551	10:32	u1t6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος ξενίζεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1552	10:32	jhzt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα & παρὰ θάλασσαν	1	Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1553	10:33	p5ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σέ & σύ & σοι	1	The word you is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1554	10:33	ruf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος	1	This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1555	10:33	lzie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Cornelius is using the word we to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1556	10:33	ry21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Cornelius is using the word before. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1557	10:33	xt4x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1558	10:33	jc88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by the Lord.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1559	10:34	cyn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀνοίξας & Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν	1	It might seem that the expression opening his mouth … said contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1560	10:34	iii7			προσωπολήμπτης	1	Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”
1561	10:34	ha31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός	1	As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1562	10:35	b5cr			ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην	1	Here, fearing has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”
1563	10:35	j78e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1564	10:36	aac8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον	1	Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this word; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state “You know the word” in this verse as well. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1565	10:36	ht1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Peter is using the term word to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1566	10:36	anlh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ	1	Peter is using the word sons to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1567	10:36	ok9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1568	10:36	md1l			πάντων	1	The word all could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”
1569	10:37	wecw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ & ῥῆμα	1	Peter is using the term word to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1570	10:37	ch65		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1571	10:37	sq2i			μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης	1	Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and then baptized them”
1572	10:38	seli		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς	1	It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1573	10:38	p2qi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς	1	Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1574	10:38	ku82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει	1	Peter speaks of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1575	10:38	vuwo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εὐεργετῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1576	10:38	y5ya		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	Peter says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1577	10:38	tj3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	The expression was with him is an idiom. See how you translated it in 7:9. Alternate translation: “God was helping him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1578	10:39	kal7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες	1	Here, we refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1579	10:39	sx3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν	1	The pronoun whom refers to Jesus, and the pronoun they refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who conspired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1580	10:39	z4dt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says tree to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1581	10:40	zxuk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτον	1	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1582	10:40	cxj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	Here, raised … up is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1583	10:40	w8kv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1584	10:40	iz8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1585	10:41	nm81		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you could adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1586	10:41	jq89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1587	10:41	zpyj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1588	10:41	xlbl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ	1	Peter is using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1589	10:41	q7d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1590	10:42	ik96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here, us refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1591	10:42	zne5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	Connecting Statement: By the people, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1592	10:42	c1ak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1593	10:42	ws4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν	1	Peter is using the adjectives living and dead as nouns. (The word living is actually a participle, but it functions here as an adjective.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1594	10:43	ub5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1595	10:43	y6d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	Peter is speaking of the name of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1596	10:44	cz7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in 8:16. Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
1597	10:44	wf7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also listening to his message, the word all refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1598	10:44	o839		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1599	10:45	j6wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & πιστοὶ	1	Luke is using the adjective faithful as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1600	10:45	qlpu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	Luke is using the term circumcision by association to identify these faithful people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1601	10:45	g161		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1602	10:45	mqs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκκέχυται	1	Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1603	10:45	hfs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	Luke is using a possessive form to identify the Holy Spirit as a gift from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1604	10:45	f33n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη	1	Here, also refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1605	10:46	p6pa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαλούντων γλώσσαις	1	The implication is that at least some of these languages were ones that the Jews recognized and could understand, but which Cornelius and his guests had not learned. This caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Holy Spirit was giving them the ability to speak these languages. Alternate translation: “speaking in languages they had not learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1606	10:47	zktm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding is he. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1607	10:47	u5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1	Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1608	10:47	vuax		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1	Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb withhold and the negative particle not. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1609	10:47	df24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ ὕδωρ	1	Peter is using water, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1610	10:47	kwv5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1611	10:48	l8ci		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι	1	The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1612	10:48	z4fh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1613	10:48	ax6x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι	1	Here, in the name is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in 10:43. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:48. Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1614	11:intro	hva5				0	Acts 11 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter “The Gentiles also had received the word of God” Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter “the Lord” In verse 16, Peter refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Luke refers to Jesus the same way in the second instance of the phrase in verse 21 and in verses 23 and 24. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Peter’s summary of his visit to Cornelius In Acts 11:5–17, Peter summarizes the events that are described in greater detail in 10:9–47. Very similar language is used throughout both passages. As you translate 11:5–17, in order to ensure that your translation is consistent, compare how you translated specific terms and phrases in 10:9–47.
1615	11:1	ab75		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1616	11:1	f1md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	2	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1617	11:1	w3rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Peter, by using words, shared with Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1618	11:2	kb4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke says that Peter came up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1619	11:2	yar6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	As in 10:45, Luke is using the term circumcision by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely to have been strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1620	11:3	pcce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς.	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1621	11:3	zmou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς	1	This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these men. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1622	11:3	ah7v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας	1	The phrase men having foreskins refers to men who are not Jewish. It is a crude and dismissive expression, and it shows that these Jewish believers still regarded Gentiles with disdain. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised men” or “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1623	11:4	aakb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀρξάμενος & Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς	1	Luke is using the word beginning to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1624	11:5	dtt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθιεμένην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1625	11:6	lbh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	From Peter’s response in 11:8, the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. See how you translated this in 10:12. Alternate translation: “ … and the birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1626	11:7	gm0m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	Peter speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1627	11:7	ag7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστάς	1	Here the term arising means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1628	11:7	t1mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λεγούσης μοι, ἀναστάς, Πέτρε, θῦσον καὶ φάγε	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling me to arise and kill and eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1629	11:8	p8vb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπον δέ, μηδαμῶς, Κύριε, ὅτι κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I told the Lord that I would certainly not do that, since the common or unclean had never entered my mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1630	11:8	m4mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	μηδαμῶς	1	By no means is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. See how you translated this in 10:14. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
1631	11:8	nbju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον	1	The words common and unclean mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “food that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1632	11:8	m5p5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the common or unclean, like some of those animals, has never entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1633	11:8	wwbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the word never and the negative terms common and unclean. Alternate translation: “only what is holy and clean has ever entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1634	11:8	j0rv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	Peter is using one part of the eating process to represent the entire process. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “I have never eaten anything that is common or unclean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1635	11:9	at0t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “from heaven and told me that I must not make common what God had cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1636	11:9	b24j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1637	11:9	txbl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	The voice is adding the pronoun you for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1638	11:10	xrq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in 10:16. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1639	11:10	s2ik		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνεσπάσθη & ἅπαντα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling everything up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1640	11:11	ias8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἦμεν	1	The term we refers to Peter and the others in the house in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1641	11:11	b2qv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἐξαυτῆς	1	Peter is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on how soon after his vision ended these three men arrived. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “right then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1642	11:11	k44j			ἐξαυτῆς	1	Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”
1643	11:11	qwn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1644	11:12	lf6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲν διακρίναντα	1	This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” See how you translated this in 10:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1645	11:12	xrc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι	1	Peter is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “these six fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1646	11:12	w6ia		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	Peter implicitly means the house of Cornelius. Alternate translation: “the house of the man who had sent the messengers to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1647	11:13	mwzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	The term us refers to Peter and the believers who came with him to Caesarea. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1648	11:13	few6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the same phrase in 10:32. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1649	11:14	rwpw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ῥήματα	1	The angel is using the term words to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1650	11:14	fnjz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σὲ & σωθήσῃ σὺ & σου	1	All the instances of the words you and your in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1651	11:14	p3gk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1652	11:14	hpr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου	1	Here, house refers to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1653	11:15	a8jw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν	1	Peter is using the word began to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word began, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1654	11:15	ak2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it fell on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in 8:16 and 10:44. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit, just as we did in the beginning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1655	11:15	qdon		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1656	11:15	qy12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	Here the word us refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1657	11:15	th4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	By in the beginning, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1658	11:16	xd9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ῥήματος	1	Peter is using the term word to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1659	11:16	ett3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1660	11:16	wwnl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to Chapter 1, and see how you translated this in 1:5. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1661	11:16	v116		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1662	11:17	pe42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here the word us refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1663	11:17	y7ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν	1	Peter is referring to the gift of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the gift of the Holy Spirit, just as he did to us when we believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1664	11:17	u3nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	Peter is using the question form to convince his listeners that God wanted him to accept the Gentile believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1665	11:17	xpsl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	For emphasis, Peter is adding the pronoun I, which is not required with the verb. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with verbs but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1666	11:17	ot1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	It may be helpful to indicate in what way Peter thought he might be able to hinder God. Alternate translation: “to hinder God by refusing to welcome and baptize people to whom he had given his own Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1667	11:18	xlpt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἡσύχασαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter was speaking. Alternate translation: “the Jewish believers became quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1668	11:18	nr7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡσύχασαν	1	This is an idiom that means they no longer argued. Alternate translation: “they no longer argued with Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1669	11:18	z3fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of repentance and life, you could express the same idea in other ways. Here the term life refers to everlasting life. Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles as well to repent and live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1670	11:19	bwb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	οὖν	1	Luke uses the word translated Then to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1671	11:19	whm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the persecution that Luke describes in 8:1, which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1672	11:19	w3wq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοινίκης	1	The word Phoenicia is the name of a region. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1673	11:19	ig50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κύπρου	1	The word ** Cyprus** is the name of an island. See how you translated it in 4:36. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1674	11:19	zbml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1675	11:19	c8ha		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	μηδενὶ λαλοῦντες τὸν λόγον εἰ μὴ μόνον Ἰουδαίοις	1	Since Luke says here that the scattered believers spoke about Jesus only to Jews, but he says in the next verse that some of them spoke to “Greeks” (that is, Gentiles), it might appear in your language that Luke was contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Most of them believed they should speak the message about Jesus only to Jews, so that is what they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
1676	11:20	ogva		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Κύπριοι καὶ Κυρηναῖοι	1	Luke is describing these men in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “Cypriot and Cyrenian men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1677	11:20	k6si		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κύπριοι	1	The word Cypriots is the name for people who come from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1678	11:20	tz12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κυρηναῖοι	1	The word Cyrenians is the name for people who come from the city of Cyrene. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1679	11:20	mww9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that these people he calls Greeks were not necessarily from Greece; rather, they were Greek-speaking people who were also Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1680	11:21	ebxq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	χεὶρ Κυρίου	1	In this instance, Luke seems to mean God the Father when he says the Lord. In 4:29–30, the believers pray, “Lord … stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen through the name of your holy Servant Jesus.” Luke seems to be describing these events as part of the answer to that prayer. Alternate translation: “the hand of God the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1681	11:21	aj5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χεὶρ	1	Here, the hand represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1682	11:21	bfm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἦν & μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	When Luke says that God was with the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1683	11:21	n9pq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	Luke speaks of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically turned to the Lord. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1684	11:21	qcn3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1685	11:22	i7vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἠκούσθη & ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν	1	In your language, the expression was heard in the ears might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1686	11:22	kcb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “The church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1687	11:22	rdhr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	Luke is using the term word to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1688	11:22	oa8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & ἐξαπέστειλαν	1	The pronoun them refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun they refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1689	11:23	b7w7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how gracious God had been to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1690	11:23	bz6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας	1	Here the heart represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1691	11:24	b9a8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why Barnabas encouraged the new believers in Antioch so well. Alternate translation: “He was able to do this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1692	11:24	he5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως	1	Luke speaks of Barnabas as if he were a container that was full of the Holy Spirit and of faith. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who had strong faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1693	11:24	m7yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	καὶ πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who believed firmly in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1694	11:24	e35e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God added a considerable crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1695	11:24	e57t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke says the Lord (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1696	11:25	yhl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1697	11:26	qzml		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun him refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1698	11:26	z36c			ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year”
1699	11:26	w4dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτοῖς & συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1700	11:26	x8gx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χρηματίσαι & πρώτως & τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people first called the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1701	11:26	w0sz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Χριστιανούς	1	The word Christians is a name for people who believe that Jesus is the Christ, that is, the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1702	11:26	r6sl			πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ	1	Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”
1703	11:27	h6zw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1704	11:27	kep8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταύταις & ταῖς ἡμέραις	1	Luke is using the word days to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1705	11:27	d8bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	Luke says that these prophets came down from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1706	11:28	q3tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Here, having arisen means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1707	11:28	w18f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	The term whole is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1708	11:28	pd2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by world, he means the part of the world that they were familiar with. Alternate translation: “the … Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1709	11:28	jmc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου	1	The expression upon Claudius refers to the time during the reign of Claudius. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1710	11:28	fjyk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κλαυδίου	1	The word Claudius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1711	11:29	rk9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν & μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν & πέμψαι	1	The implication is that while some of the disciples were prospering greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1712	11:29	up7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς & ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1713	11:30	taw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the elders who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1714	11:30	l8i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	Here, the hand, one part of a person, represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take it to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1715	11:30	rq2w			διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	If you retain the figurative word hand in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul”
1716	12:intro	f66j				0	Acts 12 General Notes Structure and Formatting Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas and Saul were delivering money from Antioch to Jerusalem, as described in 11:25–30. Herod killed one of the apostles, James, and he put Peter in prison. God helped Peter escape from the prison, so Herod executed the prison guards, but God then killed Herod.
1717	12:1	ti1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1718	12:1	f2gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατ’ ἐκεῖνον & τὸν καιρὸν	1	The phrase that time implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1719	12:1	zy6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	The expression laid on hands means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. See how you translated it in 5:18. Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1720	12:1	og4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest some from the church. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1721	12:2	r1zv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνεῖλεν & Ἰάκωβον	1	It was probably not Herod himself who killed James. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to execute James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1722	12:3	v4ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1723	12:3	ly66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	The phrase Unleavened Bread is the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several days. If your readers would not be familiar with the food known as “bread” or the substance known as “leaven,” you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “the days of Special Food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1724	12:4	tza2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν	1	The pronouns whom refers to Peter, and the pronoun he refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1725	12:4	pps1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν	1	These quaternions were groups of four soldiers each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1726	12:4	i23a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	βουλόμενος & ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ	1	The phrase to bring him out means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1727	12:5	xpcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ & Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1728	12:5	f8qc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσευχὴ & ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1729	12:6	km83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν	1	Here, the word translated to bring him out is slightly different from the word translated that same way in 12:4. It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1730	12:6	g2bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with two chains binding him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1731	12:7	i7g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἄγγελος	1	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly this angel appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1732	12:9	wqct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	οὐκ ᾔδει ὅτι ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; ἐδόκει δὲ	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here and to add a sentence break. Alternate translation: “he did not realize, ‘What is being done by the angel is real!’ He was thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1733	12:9	p9ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what the angel was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1734	12:9	s9j0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐδόκει & ὅραμα βλέπειν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1735	12:10	r7gy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διελθόντες & πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν	1	The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1736	12:10	e36s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ δευτέραν	1	The word guard can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1737	12:11	wlb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν	1	The phrase having come to himself means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1738	12:11	ue4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χειρὸς	1	Here, hand represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1739	12:11	p739		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of expectation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1740	12:11	sl07		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Luke is likely using the phrase the Jewish people to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1741	12:12	ux4v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1742	12:12	c1ur		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἱκανοὶ	1	Luke is using the adjective many as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1743	12:13	pfn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κρούσαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	To “knock” at a door means to tap or hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1744	12:13	c634		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	Here, the word gate probably describes an entrance from the street to a courtyard in front of the house. If houses in your culture have a similar entrance, in your translation you could use the name for it in your language. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1745	12:13	vbjj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥόδη	1	The word Rhoda is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1746	12:14	y2ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1747	12:15	j2kx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & εἶπαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the people who were inside the house praying. Alternate translation: “the people who were inside the house praying said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1748	12:15	qa8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ	1	Some Jews believed in guardian angels, and the people inside thehouse may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you saw was Peter’s guardian angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1749	12:16	wwg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1	While the word they refers to the people in the house as in the previous verse, it is likely that only some of them came to the door. Alternate translation: “so some of the people in the house came and opened the door, and they saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1750	12:17	fr3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰακώβῳ	1	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by James, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1751	12:17	jf16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1752	12:18	ail9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1753	12:18	zl7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1754	12:18	bt2b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
1755	12:18	plyg			τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	The word translated become can be used to indicate that a person has entered a new condition, and in this context it indicates that Peter has changed his location. Alternate translation: “where then Peter had gone”
1756	12:19	blx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun him refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1757	12:19	pz6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν	1	It was probably not Herod himself who searched for Peter. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “having ordered a search for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1758	12:19	br16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθὼν	1	Luke speaks of Herod having gone down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1759	12:20	aip7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1760	12:20	l5gl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦν & θυμομαχῶν	1	The pronoun he refers to Herod. Alternate translation: “Herod was quarreling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1761	12:20	osyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τυρίοις & Σιδωνίοις	1	Tyrians is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and Sidonians is the name for people from the city of Sidon. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1762	12:20	mpgk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1763	12:20	gxs4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1764	12:20	oln5			ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in 1:14. Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him”
1765	12:20	qsg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βλάστον	1	The word Blastus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1766	12:20	qqj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τοῦ βασιλέως	1	This phrase indicates that Blastus was an official whom the king trusted with important responsibilities for his personal affairs. In your translation, use the word or phrase for the most comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “the king’s chamberlain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1767	12:20	l5r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were asking the king to restore peaceful relations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1768	12:20	j253		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1769	12:20	dy51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	The implication is that Herod had stopped supplying food to the people of Tyre and Sidon because he was angry with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply, and Herod had cut off that supply because he was angry with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1770	12:21	e3w9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τακτῇ & ἡμέρᾳ	1	The implication is that this was the day on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1771	12:21	kv7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Putting on this royal clothing, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the throne were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1772	12:21	g6ir			καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	The throne was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
1773	12:22	feyy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου	1	The people are using one part of Herod, his voice, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1774	12:23	iw57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1775	12:23	d419		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	The word translated worm-eaten is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word worm-eaten expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1776	12:23	pjbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel struck Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word struck is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1777	12:24	sv8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with and. The verb being multiplied tells in what way the word of God was increasing, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1778	12:24	m1sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were increasing and being multiplied. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1779	12:24	wn8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1780	12:24	iwr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπληθύνετο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1781	12:25	j2un		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated Then to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1782	12:25	rt9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	1	This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they returned to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1783	12:25	t7d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading to is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1784	12:25	pv6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	1	This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in 11:29–30. Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1785	12:25	zhsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in 12:12. Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1786	13:intro	rlh6				0	Acts 13 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus. Verses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus. Verses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41. The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul. Special Concepts in this Chapter A light for the Gentiles The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter “the Lord” In verses 2, 12, 48, and 49, Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Paul refers to Jesus the same way in verses 10 and 11. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia In verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term our to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1787	13:1	fij7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1788	13:1	srw6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ	1	The word Simeon is the name of a man. The word Niger is another name by which he was known. This is not a racial epithet; it is the Latin word for “black,” and it probably indicates that he was African. Alternate translation: “Simeon the African” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1789	13:1	nqp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Simeon, whom people called Niger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1790	13:1	ccel		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μαναήν	1	The word Manaen is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1791	13:1	o8jb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος	1	The word Lucius is the name of a man. The word Cyrenian is the name for someone who comes from the city of Cyrene. See how you translated it in 11:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1792	13:1	u48c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σύντροφος	1	In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the foster brother of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1793	13:1	hxh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου	1	In the Roman Empire, a tetrarch was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. Herod the tetrarch ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in Chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1794	13:2	m70r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	λειτουργούντων & αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	The expression ministering to means that the believers in Antioch were worshiping God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1795	13:2	kox1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
1796	13:2	ifb9			ἀφορίσατε	1	Alternate translation: “Set apart”
1797	13:2	j6ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς.	1	The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the work of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in Chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1798	13:3	l0cj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	νηστεύσαντες, καὶ προσευξάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, ἀπέλυσαν	1	The pronouns their and they refer to the believers in Antioch, and the pronoun them refers to Barnabas and Saul. The phrase having fasted and prayed refers to all of them. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “after they had all fasted and prayed together, the believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul, and then the believers released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1799	13:3	ku45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς	1	The believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul as a symbolic action to show that they were sending them on their mission with the blessing and support of the whole church and that they were entrusting them to God’s care. Alternate translation: “placed their hands on them as a sign of blessing and support and as a way of entrusting them to God’s care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1800	13:3	p1us		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπέλυσαν	1	While in this context the term released basically means “sent off,” the implication is that the believers in Antioch were freeing Barnabas and Saul of all of their responsibilities in the church so that they could go on the mission on which the Holy Spirit was sending them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gave them the freedom to go on their new mission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1801	13:4	abcj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ & ἐκπεμφθέντες	1	The pronoun they refers to Barnabas and Saul. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1802	13:4	pisj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had sent them out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1803	13:4	iyh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	Luke says that Barnabas and Saul went down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1804	13:4	d1q5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σελεύκιαν	1	The word Seleucia is the name of a city that is on the seacoast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1805	13:5	at85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαλαμῖνι	1	The word Salamis is the name of a city on the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1806	13:5	ct8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Barnabas and Saul to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1807	13:6	cl2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάφου	1	The word Paphos is the name of a major city on the island of Cyprus. It was where the Roman proconsul lived. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1808	13:6	zf3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὗρον	1	The word found does not mean that Barnabas, Saul, and Mark were intentionally searching for a certain man. They happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “they happened to meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1809	13:6	xe7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον	1	The word magician here does not mean someone who entertains others with tricks based on slight of hand and optical illusions. It means someone who practices witchcraft or supernatural magic arts. Your language and culture may have a term for such a person that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1810	13:6	ak38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς	1	The words Bar Jesus are a name that means “Son of Jesus.” However, there was no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. Jesus was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1811	13:7	s1su		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ ἀνθυπάτῳ	1	A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1812	13:7	pf5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σεργίῳ Παύλῳ	1	The words Sergius and Paulus are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1813	13:7	h5xx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ	1	Luke provides this background information about Sergius Paulus to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1814	13:8	lp2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος	1	The word Elymas is an Arabic word that Bar-Jesus was using as another name. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, the Magician. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
1815	13:8	qw4j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for that is how one translates his name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1816	13:8	w2xt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως	1	Here, to turn someone away from something is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1817	13:9	fy7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking of Paul as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1818	13:9	w3lh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit was inspiring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1819	13:10	un00		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	Paul is using the adjective full as a noun to identify Elymas as a person who is full of the negative qualities he describes. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “O you who are full of all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1820	13:10	u8n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of deceit and trickery, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “O you who are always deceiving and tricking other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1821	13:10	r8x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were a container that was full of negative qualities. Alternate translation: “O you who practice all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1822	13:10	wq5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	The terms deceit and wickedness mean similar things. Paul may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “of all evil treachery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1823	13:10	kdwj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	Paul says all in these two instances as a generalization for emphasis. (But when he calls Elymas the enemy of all righteousness, that may be understood more literally.) Alternate translation: “of great deceit and great trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1824	13:10	d2pk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	υἱὲ διαβόλου	1	The expression son of describes a person who shares the qualities of something or someone else. Paul is saying that Elymas is acting like the devil in trying to keep Sergius Paulus from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1825	13:10	jgq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	υἱὲ διαβόλου	1	Paul is drawing an implicit contrast between Elymas’ claim to be the “son of Jesus” (Bar Jesus) and his actual character as a son of the devil. If you retain the “son of” idiom in your translation, you could bring out this contrast explicitly. If you do, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are not the son of Jesus—you are the son of the devil!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1826	13:10	hlq9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul is speaking of righteousness as if it were a person who could have an enemy. If your language would not use this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “opposed to all righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1827	13:10	wa8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enemy of everything that is right” or “opposed to everything that is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1828	13:10	bc9p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας?	1	Paul is using the question form to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must stop turning aside the straight paths of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1829	13:10	p8sa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας	1	Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were physically redirecting paths that God wanted people to follow so that these paths no longer went straight. He means that if people believe in God and obey him, they live in the right way, and that Elymas is trying to keep people, especially Sergius Paulus, from doing that. Alternate translation: “preventing people from believing in God, obeying him, and living right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1830	13:11	q0w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Paul is using the term behold to focus Elymas’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1831	13:11	xul9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ	1	Here the word hand represents the power of God, and the phrase upon you indicates punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord is going to punish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1832	13:11	w3gh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τυφλὸς, μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον	1	Paul is using a word and a phrase together to express a single idea. The phrase not seeing the sun tells to what degree Elymas will be blind. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “so blind that you will not be able to tell whether it is day or night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1833	13:11	t7j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος	1	Paul is speaking of this mist and darkness as if they were going to fall on Elymas. Alternate translation: “what Elymas could see became blurry and then dark” or see the next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1834	13:11	x7rt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος	1	Luke may be using the two words mist and darkness together to express a single idea. The word mist may tell what kind of darkness was all that Elymas could see. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “a misty darkness was all that Elymas could see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1835	13:12	x9fl			ὁ ἀνθύπατος	1	A proconsul was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “the governor”
1836	13:12	twa8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The teaching of the Lord astonished him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1837	13:12	ob5x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the word teaching to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1838	13:12	efle		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	In this possessive form, the Lord is the object rather than the subject of teaching. That is, this does not mean “what the Lord taught,” it means “what Barnabas and Paul taught about the Lord.” you could state that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1839	13:13	r9hi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1840	13:13	i65t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1	The phrase those around Paul refers to Barnabas and John (who is also called John Mark). This phrase provides some background to the rest of the story by indicating that Paul had become the leader of the group. It is important to communicate this by keeping Paul’s name first when he is mentioned with others, for example, in 13:46, 13:50, etc. The order of names is important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1841	13:13	abcl			οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1	Alternate translation: “Paul and his traveling companions”
1842	13:13	mmj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας	1	The word Perga is the name of a city, and the word Pamphylia is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1843	13:14	et2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1844	13:14	c21u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκάθισαν	1	Paul and Barnabas may have sat down in the place where rabbis would sit, or in the way that rabbis would sit, as a way of asking permission to speak to the congregation. The fact that they were invited to speak (13:15) suggests that this is the case. Alternate translation: “sat down as rabbis would, to ask permission to speak to the congregation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1845	13:15	dnb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	The word Law is the name for one part of the Hebrew Scriptures, and the word Prophets is the name for another part of the Hebrew Scriptures. Even though these are common nouns, Luke is using them to mean specific things. Show this in your translation in the way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1846	13:15	kno1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” or “You brothers of ours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1847	13:15	td4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	The synagogue leaders are using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1848	13:15	jru8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν	1	The synagogue leaders are using the term word to mean what Barnabas or Paul would want to say using words. Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1849	13:15	kj1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	λέγετε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates an invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an invitation. Alternate translation: “we invite you to speak it now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1850	13:16	keqb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the term arising means that Paul stood up to show that he indeed wanted to speak, as he had been invited to do. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:14. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he wanted to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1851	13:16	i8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ	1	This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He wanted everyone in the synagogue to hear what he had to say from the very first word, so he did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1852	13:16	m0yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται, καὶ οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Israelites and you who fear God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1853	13:16	rh93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression fearing God to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. That is what Paul means here. See how you translated the similar expression in 10:2. Alternate translation: “you Gentiles who sincerely worship the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1854	13:16	ah55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀκούσατε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1855	13:17	se2b			ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ	1	Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”
1856	13:17	tbc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form of the word our here and in verses 32 and 33. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1857	13:17	l9cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1858	13:17	aaj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν	1	When Paul says that God exalted the people of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1859	13:17	vw4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ	1	Here, an uplifted arm describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1860	13:18	zv9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς	1	This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. Paul would be quoting Deuteronomy 1:13 from a well-known Greek translation. If the reading put up with them is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in 13:40–41. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1861	13:19	nvp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, the pronoun them refers to the Israelites, and the pronoun their refers to the seven nations that God destroyed. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God gave the Israelites for an inheritance the land that these seven nations had previously occupied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1862	13:20	xyg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “All these events took place over a period of about 450 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1863	13:20	qmc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου	1	This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1864	13:21	yxi8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1865	13:22	bsp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα	1	Here, the expression raised up describes God giving someone an important position. See how you translated it in 3:22. Alternate translation: “made David their king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1866	13:22	akg6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου	1	In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel 13:14 and Psalm 89:20.) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1867	13:22	dbu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εὗρον	1	While God was indeed searching for someone to replace Saul, here the word found does not refer to the results of that search, but rather to God’s estimation of David. Alternate translation: “I have recognized that David, son of Jesse, is a man according to my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1868	13:22	mp53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου	1	This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1869	13:23	xj5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τούτου & ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος	1	This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1870	13:23	vnz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ σπέρματος	1	The term seed means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1871	13:23	l50d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτου	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to David. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1872	13:23	kc76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	Here, Israel refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1873	13:24	wbpf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰωάννου	1	By John, Paul is referring implicitly to John the Baptist. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1874	13:24	xzf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	In your language, the expression before the face of his entrance, meaning “before the appearance of his entry into ministry” (see next two notes), might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “before he appeared” or “before he entered into his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1875	13:24	abcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	Here the term face means “appearance.” Alternate translation: “appearance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1876	13:24	igpi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	By entrance, Paul is referring to Jesus beginning his ministry. Alternate translation: “of the start of his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1877	13:24	gqs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun his refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’ entrance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1878	13:24	x892		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to all the people of Israel a baptism that people received to show that they were repenting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1879	13:25	ntrj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν δρόμον	1	Paul is speaking of John as if he had been running a race or course. Alternate translation: “his work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1880	13:25	judg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἔλεγεν, τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it might be good to present this quotation from John the Baptist as a direct quotation if possible, since it uses several figures of speech that might not sound natural in an indirect quotation. (As an indirect quotation, this would read something like this: “he asked the people who they thought him to be, and he told them he was not he and that behold, one was coming after him, the sandals of whose feet he was not worthy to untie.”) You may be able to indicate the beginning of Paul’s quotation from John with some punctuation or convention that your language uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1881	13:25	vww3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι?	1	John is using the question form to challenge his listeners’ idea of who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not who you think I am!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1882	13:25	rp32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ	1	The pronoun he refers to the Messiah. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1883	13:25	nnl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	John is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1884	13:25	gys2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	John is using the action of untying sandals symbolically to signify humble service. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to whom I am not even worthy to offer humble service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1885	13:25	gj98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν	1	In your language, the expression the sandals of his feet might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “his sandals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1886	13:26	bwet		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1887	13:26	kci9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1888	13:26	c9pw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱοὶ	1	Paul is using the term sons to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1889	13:26	jdp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here the word us includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks this distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1890	13:26	u6zn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent the word about this salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1891	13:26	zx08		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	Paul is using the term word to mean the message that God sent about Jesus by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1892	13:26	v6r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God is saving people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1893	13:27	s64d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “not recognizing Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1894	13:27	psk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	Paul means implicitly that the people of Jerusalem and their leaders did not recognize that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “not recognizing that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1895	13:27	ri1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν	1	Paul is using the word voices to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1896	13:27	m4tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1897	13:27	i6jo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of the prophets on each Sabbath in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1898	13:28	v3hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν	1	Here the word they refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem, and the pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders asked Pilate for Jesus to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1899	13:28	iect		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1900	13:29	sq1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets had written about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1901	13:29	m5f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου	1	It may be helpful to say explicitly that Jesus had died before this happened. Alternate translation: “taking him down from the tree after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1902	13:29	vwt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ξύλου	1	The word translated tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Paul is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “from the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1903	13:30	h5jw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	Paul uses the word But to indicate a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1904	13:30	zsx4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1905	13:30	mqx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1906	13:31	zesg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	The pronoun who refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus was seen for many days by the ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1907	13:31	ig7w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1908	13:31	g4vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμέρας πλείους	1	We know from the Gospels that this period was 40 days. Translate many days with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1909	13:31	rw9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν	1	Paul says having come up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “by the ones who traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1910	13:32	h6ch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίαν γενομένην	1	Paul assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to a promise that God made. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1911	13:32	hr2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας	1	Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1912	13:33	b1uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge	ὅτι ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. you could state something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1913	13:33	t0wt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταύτην	1	Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by this he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1914	13:33	dy6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. If the reading for our children is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1915	13:33	t176		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term children to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1916	13:33	d95n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν	1	Here, raising up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “causing Jesus to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1917	13:33	y3tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1918	13:33	h9ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τῷ ψαλμῷ & τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1919	13:33	ljnl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Psalm 2 as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1920	13:33	c1pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “You are my Son, yes, today I have fathered you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1921	13:33	tla1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱός & γεγέννηκά σε	1	Son is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1922	13:34	zhjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν & εἴρηκεν	1	The pronoun he refers to God, and the pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God raised Jesus … God has spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1923	13:34	je9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν	1	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “he brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1924	13:34	h3nj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1925	13:34	ipb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά	1	This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and ultimately the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1926	13:34	q3kq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά	1	Paul is using the adjectives holy and trustworthy as nouns. ULT adds the word things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the trustworthy promises that God made to David as the ancestor of the Holy One” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1927	13:35	r1ev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἑτέρῳ	1	Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by another place, he means another place in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in another place in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1928	13:35	gl8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	καὶ & λέγει	1	Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun he refers to God, as in 13:34. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1929	13:35	d4px		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1930	13:35	jvpy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1931	13:35	hvt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	Paul is using the word see to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1932	13:35	bhos		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1933	13:36	rpb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase fell asleep. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1934	13:36	nwy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶδεν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers and he saw” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1935	13:36	f5s2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1936	13:36	la5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Paul is using the word saw to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1937	13:36	okfp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαφθοράν	1	Here, the term decay refers to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1938	13:37	bmw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃν & ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1939	13:37	n9pl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1940	13:37	j52x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	Paul is using the word see to mean “experience.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1941	13:37	g3ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διαφθοράν	1	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1942	13:38	yg35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν & ἔστω ὑμῖν	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1943	13:38	f917		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1944	13:38	qy18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word brothers as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1945	13:38	an8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτου	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1946	13:38	t3i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we are proclaiming forgiveness of sins to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1947	13:38	w7y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “release of sins is proclaimed to you, and release is also proclaimed to you from the guilt of everything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1948	13:38	xjzi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμῳ Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that you were not able to do in obedience to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1949	13:39	g5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God justifies everyone who believes in this one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1950	13:39	ki8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1951	13:40	y2kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	βλέπετε	1	Paul is using the term Look to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1952	13:40	tt1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the thing that the prophets spoke about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1953	13:40	osou		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	μὴ ἐπέλθῃ	1	Paul is speaking of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could come upon his listeners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that … may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1954	13:41	kk1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν	1	This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1955	13:41	jveu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἴδετε	1	Paul is using the term Look to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1956	13:41	xcdg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφανίσθητε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1957	13:41	dvn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔργον ἐργάζομαι & ἔργον	1	God is using the word work to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment … a judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1958	13:41	nm2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν	1	God is using the term days to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1959	13:42	ax8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν	1	Here the pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1960	13:42	f3sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρεκάλουν	1	Here the pronoun they refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1961	13:42	w9h6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1962	13:42	y4p9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	Here, words refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1963	13:43	a58z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λυθείσης & τῆς συναγωγῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the synagogue meeting ended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1964	13:43	sws7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	προσηλύτων	1	These proselytes were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. Alternate translation: “converts to Judaism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1965	13:43	mygk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἠκολούθησαν & τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ	1	In this context, to follow someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1966	13:43	fv15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to God, who had graciously saved them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1967	13:44	vq3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις	1	The city represents the people in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1968	13:44	h40t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1969	13:44	yga7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1970	13:44	evox		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1971	13:45	j4zq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1972	13:45	qrh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1973	13:45	m1an		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1974	13:46	d08v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1975	13:46	jn55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑμῖν & ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul and Barnabas are using the term word to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1976	13:46	as6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑμῖν & πρῶτον	1	Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people, and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people, and God sent the Messiah initially to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1977	13:46	lly5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν	1	Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1978	13:46	ms36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς	1	Paul does not seriously believe that the Jewish leaders do not consider themselves worthy of eternal life. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. Alternate translation: “are acting as if you judge yourselves not worthy of eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1979	13:46	kzm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Paul and Barnabas are using the term behold to focus the attention of the Jewish leaders on what they are about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1980	13:46	rf9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1	Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they are going to be physically turning toward the Gentiles. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1981	13:46	zvt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	στρεφόμεθα	1	By we, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1982	13:47	tx94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	By us, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1983	13:47	xbiw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
1984	13:47	v8au		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς	1	Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a light that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1985	13:47	za1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	σε	1	The word you is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1986	13:47	t5sp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἶναί & εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1987	13:47	ismw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	This phrase is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1988	13:48	e9ag		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1989	13:48	jct2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τεταγμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1990	13:49	qh9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1991	13:49	fpkr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεφέρετο & ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1992	13:50	u8rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1993	13:50	ef21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παρώτρυναν	1	Luke says that the Jewish leaders stirred up these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1994	13:50	f5yd			τὰς σεβομένας γυναῖκας τὰς εὐσχήμονας	1	Alternate translation: “the influential women among the Gentile women who worshiped in the synagogue”
1995	13:50	wmm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς πρώτους	1	Luke is using the adjective principal as a noun, to mean people who are important. (ULT adds the word ones to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most important men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1996	13:50	uc54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun they refers to the influential women and important men, not to the Jewish leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the influential women and important men threw them out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1997	13:50	cq9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	Luke is probably not speaking literally when he says that they threw them out. It is unlikely that they actually picked up Paul and Barnabas and heaved them through the air. Alternate translation: “they forced Paul and Barnabas to leave their boundaries” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1998	13:50	kzzk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia by association with the way that it had boundaries and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1999	13:51	abco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2000	13:51	xi1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2001	13:52	dp5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἵ & μαθηταὶ	1	Here, the disciples implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2002	13:52	hhgj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	Luke is speaking of these disciples as if they were a container that joy and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2003	14:intro	rsg2				0	Acts 14 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium. Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra. Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch. Special Concepts in this Chapter “the word of his grace” The expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Zeus and Hermes In this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encouraged the new believers in the cities that they had visited.
2004	14:1	hk1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2005	14:1	f4sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	λαλῆσαι	1	It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2006	14:2	wc4x			οἱ & ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”
2007	14:2	n2pp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπήγειραν	1	Luke says that these Jewsstirred up the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2008	14:2	k8mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their souls, to mean all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2009	14:2	fu13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2010	14:3	a3gp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὖν	1	Luke uses the word But here to indicate a contrast between what the unfaithful Jews did and what Paul and Barnabas did in response. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2011	14:3	fifi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ἐπὶ τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2012	14:3	f2xh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2013	14:3	wcn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2014	14:3	c2cv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2015	14:3	p9iq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	Here, hands represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2016	14:4	btu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσχίσθη & τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2017	14:4	q1xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2018	14:5	q6g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς	1	Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word stone tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to mistreat Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “to put them to death by stoning them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2019	14:6	tpl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Λυκαονίας	1	The word Lycaonia is the name of a district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2020	14:6	tl4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δέρβην	1	The wordDerbe is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2021	14:8	wb5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ & ἐκάθητο	1	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2022	14:8	kz7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀδύνατος & τοῖς ποσὶν	1	Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their feet when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2023	14:8	tca1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the womb of his mother when he was born. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lame from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2024	14:9	di49		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν	1	The pronouns he and him refer to the lame man, and the pronoun who refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
2025	14:9	xak4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2026	14:9	uwov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean healed.) Alternate translation: “he could trust Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2027	14:10	i2kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶπεν & ἥλατο	1	The first instance of the pronoun He refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2028	14:10	tect		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός	1	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah gives you the ability to walk” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
2029	14:10	sagd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός!	1	It might seem that the expression Arise upon your feet contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “Get up!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2030	14:10	v1kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἥλατο	1	The implication is that the man’s legs were completely healed. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the man was completely healed and he jumped up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2031	14:11	isyz			ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
2032	14:11	lvs9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	The phrase raised up their voice is an idiom that means that the crowds spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they said loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2033	14:11	dw4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	Λυκαονιστὶ λέγοντες, οἱ θεοὶ ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις, κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying in Lycaonian that the gods, having been made like men, had come down to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2034	14:11	x3bi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λυκαονιστὶ	1	The word Lycaonian is the name of the language that was spoken in district District of Lycaonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2035	14:11	rm85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having become like men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2036	14:12	t7uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δία	1	The word Zeus is the name of a pagan god who was considered to be the ruler of all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2037	14:12	hh25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἑρμῆν	1	The word Hermes is the name of the pagan god who was thought to bring messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2038	14:12	i1fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸν δὲ Παῦλον, Ἑρμῆν,	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they were calling Paul ‘Hermes,’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2039	14:12	d9lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2040	14:12	l63q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου	1	Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2041	14:13	iz6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως	1	Luke is using the name Zeus to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus, which was before the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2042	14:13	sh4o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως	1	Here, before means “in front of”. Luke is referring to the temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city of Iconium. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “of the Temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2043	14:13	v2a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταύρους καὶ στέμματα	1	The implication is that the priest had put these wreaths on the oxen because they were going to be offered as a sacrifice. That was the custom in this culture. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “oxen that were wearing wreaths as sacrificial animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2044	14:13	ud37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	σὺν τοῖς ὄχλοις ἤθελεν θύειν	1	Luke means implicitly that the priest of Zeus wanted to offer the oxen as sacrifices to Paul and Barnabas, whom the people thought were the gods Zeus and Hermes. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “was wanting to offer sacrifice with the crowds to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2045	14:14	kx43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν	1	Barnabas and Paul tore their clothes as a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “tearing their clothing to show how distressed they were that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2046	14:14	wa4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	κράζοντες	1	Together with the word “saying” in the next verse, the phrase “crying out” expresses a single idea. The phrase crying out tells how Barnabas and Paul were saying what they said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “saying loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2047	14:15	ee13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul and Barnabas are likely using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women, since both men and women of Lystra were probably in the crowd that wanted to sacrifice to them. To make this clear to your readers, you could use a term in your language that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “You people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2048	14:15	w4fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε?	1	Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you would express this question as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “People, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2049	14:15	u9pq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι	1	People in this culture believed that the gods did not have passions as humans do. So the implication of this statement is that Paul and Barnabas are human beings and not gods. You can include this information in your translation if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “We are human beings just like you. We are not gods!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2050	14:15	n98g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they want the people in Lystra physically to turn from idol worship and believe in the one true God. They mean that the people should stop living in one way and should start living in another way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2051	14:15	blhg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τούτων τῶν ματαίων	1	Paul and Barnabas are using the adjective useless as a noun to mean the false gods that the people of Lystra had been worshiping. ULT adds the word things to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “these false gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2052	14:15	qr5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	This expression is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2053	14:15	lw9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2054	14:16	vpt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2055	14:17	kig8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative preposition without. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2056	14:17	c1se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς	1	It might seem that the expression rains from the sky contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “providing rain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2057	14:17	ps9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐμπιπλῶν & τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their hearts, meaning their desires, to mean their entire beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2058	14:17	en5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word gladness tells how the food that God provided made these people feel. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “enjoyable food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2059	14:19	wmc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	It may be helpful to state explicitly what they persuaded the crowds to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the crowds not to believe Paul and Barnabas and to turn violently against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2060	14:20	aqx3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν & εἰσῆλθεν & ἐξῆλθεν	1	The pronouns him and he refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2061	14:21	lint		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	μαθητεύσαντες ἱκανοὺς	1	Luke is using the adjective many as a noun to mean the people who became disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “having helped many people to become disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2062	14:22	ek9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν	1	Luke is using one part of the disciples, their souls, to represent their entire beings as believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2063	14:22	zkd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “encouraging them to keep believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2064	14:22	d9ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2065	14:22	ci6q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun kingdom with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “It is necessary for us to endure many afflictions in order to live in allegiance to God as our true king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2066	14:22	wu1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	By us, Paul and Barnabas mean both themselves and the believers to whom they were speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2067	14:23	pk5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	χειροτονήσαντες & παρέθεντο & πεπιστεύκεισαν	1	The pronoun them refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun they refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2068	14:23	mqp9			κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν	1	Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers”
2069	14:23	n81l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2070	14:25	t513		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2071	14:25	h8sh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν	1	Luke says that Paul and Barnabas went down to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2072	14:26	f2cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2073	14:26	p2gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had asked God to care for them graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2074	14:27	vcd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀνήγγελλον & αὐτῶν & ἤνοιξεν	1	The pronouns they and them refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun he refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting … them … God had opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2075	14:27	qcl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God had done something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership with God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do by working together with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2076	14:27	vymy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	Here, the possessive form describes not a door consisting of faith but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2077	14:27	b4id		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	Here the expression opened a door means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2078	14:27	xgvb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2079	14:28	abcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2080	15:intro	h917				0	Acts 15 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses. Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) Special Concepts in this Chapter Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses? Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
2081	15:1	su66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τινες	1	Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2082	15:1	p3k9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2083	15:1	zi1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were teaching the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2084	15:1	pm8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2085	15:1	lwbi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2086	15:2	abcr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, not, together with a word, little, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2087	15:2	f9nd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως	1	The terms dispute and debate mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “controversy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2088	15:2	w6tc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	πρὸς αὐτοὺς & ἔταξαν & ἐξ αὐτῶν	1	The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun they and the second instance of the pronoun them refers to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2089	15:2	ek6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	Luke says to go up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2090	15:3	av5y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2091	15:3	aia5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Luke is using the phrase the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2092	15:3	rk37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of conversion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how some of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2093	15:3	nje7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2094	15:3	bbd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2095	15:3	c03o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	The word all here may be a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “in the believers in those places” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2096	15:4	ej1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church the apostles and the elders welcome them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2097	15:4	jblr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	Luke is using the phrase the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the apostles and elders separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2098	15:4	a2x1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	See how you translated this same expression in 14:27. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2099	15:5	zcv0			πεπιστευκότες	1	Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus”
2100	15:5	crr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐξανέστησαν	1	These believers stood up to indicate that they had something important to say. Alternate translation: “stood up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2101	15:5	efe5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & παραγγέλλειν	1	Both instances of the pronoun them refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in 15:3. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted … command them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2102	15:6	gqt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνήχθησάν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2103	15:6	ugu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν περὶ	1	Here the phrase to see about is an idiom that means “to consider.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2104	15:6	vcsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου τούτου	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2105	15:7	zhco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς Πέτρος	1	Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. If your readers might not understand the significance of this action, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Peter, standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2106	15:7	c2q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτούς	1	The pronoun them refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2107	15:7	s6ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2108	15:7	a6q9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Peter is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2109	15:7	wct8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν	1	Both occurrences of you are plural since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2110	15:7	hk4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	For emphasis, Peter is stating the pronoun you, which is already implied in the verb know. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2111	15:7	ftl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων	1	Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2112	15:7	s3wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου	1	Peter is using one part of himself, his mouth, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2113	15:7	b5s8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Peter is using the term word to mean the message that he shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2114	15:8	m1xc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καρδιογνώστης	1	Here, the word heart refers to a person’s character and intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2115	15:8	p6d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς	1	The implication is not that God testified to the Gentiles about Jesus, but that by giving the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, God testified to Peter and his companions that they could have genuine faith. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “testified to their genuine faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2116	15:8	abcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave the Holy Spirit to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2117	15:8	wlzx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Peter is using the word us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2118	15:9	zs2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐδὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb distinguish, which in this context means “discriminate.” Alternate translation: “he regarded them in the same way he regarded us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2119	15:9	jr3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the word us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2120	15:9	ase1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally cleansed their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2121	15:9	yi8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	Here, the word hearts represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2122	15:10	rfr4			νῦν οὖν τί	1	Now in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me, therefore: Why”
2123	15:10	zaz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι?	1	Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement, ending the verse with a period or exclamation point. Alternate translation: “you must not test God to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2124	15:10	ha45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς	1	Peter is using the words our and we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2125	15:10	n2bv			τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν	1	Here the word testing means challenging. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:9. Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”
2126	15:10	qpyd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι	1	Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a yoke on the necks of the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2127	15:10	bdfu			τὸν τράχηλον	1	Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of neck. Alternate translation: “the necks”
2128	15:10	bfd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2129	15:11	e1m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι	1	Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun ourselves. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2130	15:11	q28c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2131	15:11	nhq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι	1	Peter is using the pronoun we and the implied pronoun ourselves to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2132	15:11	d3z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through what God has graciously done for us through the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2133	15:11	ln38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Peter means implicitly that we are saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2134	15:11	e96c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι	1	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way they also will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2135	15:11	c8mw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κἀκεῖνοι	1	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the pronoun they to refer to the Gentiles. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles also will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2136	15:12	kxjq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation, as in UST: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2137	15:13	odjm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων	1	Together the words answered and saying mean that James responded to what everyone in the meeting had said to that point. Alternate translation: “James responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2138	15:13	pl6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2139	15:14	jjyc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συμεὼν	1	The word Simeon is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2140	15:14	abct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο	1	James is speaking of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2141	15:14	pnr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term name to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term name to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2142	15:15	am6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν	1	James is using the term words to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2143	15:15	j4f5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2144	15:16	m3lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω	1	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2145	15:16	h9um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀναστρέψω & ἀνοικοδομήσω & ἀνοικοδομήσω	1	The pronoun I refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2146	15:16	wqi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀναστρέψω	1	God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now return. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2147	15:16	fhdr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2148	15:16	f5wf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a tent that had fallen down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2149	15:16	u0r6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2150	15:17	hkw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2151	15:17	pe4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον	1	God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2152	15:17	sm79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον	1	God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally seek or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2153	15:17	s6de		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2154	15:17	tu21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2155	15:17	c8gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 15:14. (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2156	15:18	tr27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὰ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2157	15:19	pyb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	In your translation, you could make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble these Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2158	15:19	vr6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically turning to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of this expression plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2159	15:20	vcm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
2160	15:20	wx8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of pollution, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2161	15:20	qun9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2162	15:20	n6f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	James is likely talking about food that has been offered to idols, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2163	15:20	j2rl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, for one thing, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. For another thing, while James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood, he is saying implicitly that they should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood, and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2164	15:20	brc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ	1	James is using the adjective strangled as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2165	15:20	h27f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ πνικτοῦ	1	James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2166	15:21	si1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshiping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2167	15:21	zd7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς & ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει & ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	James is using the name Moses to mean the law associated with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2168	15:21	wp1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναγινωσκόμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2169	15:21	xg5n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατὰ πόλιν	1	The expression by city means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2170	15:22	hp6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	Here the word church describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2171	15:22	g6e8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the church in Jerusalem. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “all the people of the church in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2172	15:22	c711		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν	1	The words Judas and Barsabbas are the names of men. Barsabbas was another name by which Judas was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. See how you translated this same name for another man in 1:23. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2173	15:22	s6lv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Judas, whom people called Barsabbas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2174	15:22	s6d8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2175	15:23	k6cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν	1	Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word hand to mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2176	15:23	xz3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual	χειρὸς αὐτῶν	1	Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
2177	15:23	e4g2			οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν	1	This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
2178	15:23	kp51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοὶ & ἀδελφοῖς	1	The apostles and elders are using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2179	15:24	g8m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἠκούσαμεν & ἡμῶν & οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1	Here and in the rest of the letter, by we and us (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2180	15:24	p1tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word some refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2181	15:24	hbw5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγοις	1	The apostles and elders are using the term words to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2182	15:24	bxq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν	1	The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to whom they are writing, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2183	15:26	gldi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνθρώποις παραδεδωκόσι	1	By men, the letter implicitly means Paul and Barnabas. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those two men have handed over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2184	15:26	dhj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν	1	The letter is using the term souls to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2185	15:26	dinn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν	1	The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally handed over their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2186	15:26	t7vw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	This is a figurative expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the name of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the name of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2187	15:27	y972		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά	1	The letter is using the adjective same as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds thing to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2188	15:27	xw8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ λόγου	1	The letter is using the term word to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2189	15:28	l9z6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲν πλέον & βάρος	1	The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical burden that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2190	15:28	bx90		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2191	15:29	nt7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	εἰδωλοθύτων	1	The letter is using the adjective sacrificed, with the qualifier to idols, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2192	15:29	vcc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἵματος	1	See how you translated blood in 15:20. Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2193	15:29	rt55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πνικτῶν	1	See how you translated the strangled in 15:20. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2194	15:29	buy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἔρρωσθε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a friendly wish rather than a command. This was the customary way of ending a letter in this culture. Your language may have its own way of ending a letter that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2195	15:30	usz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2196	15:30	c3uk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	οἱ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
2197	15:30	t55a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	Luke says that these four men came down to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2198	15:30	oh4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατῆλθον	1	You may wish to retain the idiom for travel to a lower elevation, and if so, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2199	15:30	yl8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ πλῆθος	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by the crowd, he means the people of the church in Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the people of the church in Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2200	15:31	k1mr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐχάρησαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the believers in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2201	15:31	e4gf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of encouragement, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2202	15:32	r65l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες	1	When Luke says also, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were 13:1. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2203	15:32	e2en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2204	15:32	frea		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ & καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν	1	Luke is using the term word to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2205	15:32	j99g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπεστήριξαν	1	Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2206	15:33	v6im		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2207	15:33	wzw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2208	15:33	xv3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς	1	Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2209	15:34	hkh0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants		0	As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2210	15:35	anfc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2211	15:35	e7s4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2212	15:35	hnnb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2213	15:36	jjoa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἡμέρας	1	Luke is using the term days to mean “time.” Alternate translation: “time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2214	15:36	ib2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2215	15:36	ua1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Paul is using the term word to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2216	15:36	k08n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2217	15:36	y9i9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πῶς ἔχουσιν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2218	15:38	a5nn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	Παῦλος & ἠξίου & μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2219	15:39	u97a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων; τόν τε Βαρναβᾶν παραλαβόντα τὸν Μᾶρκον, ἐκπλεῦσαι εἰς Κύπρον	1	If your language does not use the passive form to be separated, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they separated from each other and Barnabas, taking Mark with him, sailed away to Cyprus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2220	15:40	l2uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παραδοθεὶς & ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the brothers had commended him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2221	15:40	tt2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ χάριτι	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the gracious care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2222	15:40	xkjo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2223	15:41	cbat		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διήρχετο	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2224	15:41	e3ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διήρχετο	1	Luke says he, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2225	15:41	s7yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	Luke is using the term churches to refer to the people associated with the churches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2226	15:41	tbv3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2227	16:intro	e7z2				0	Acts 16 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him. Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts 16:5 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book. Special Concepts in this Chapter Timothy’s circumcision Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.
2228	16:1	m5tb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1	Luke says he, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2229	16:1	rhut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1	Luke says that Paul came down to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2230	16:1	km5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατήντησεν & καὶ	1	If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than came. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2231	16:1	u3vr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2232	16:1	f49m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain disciple to introduce Timothy as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2233	16:1	mc9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκεῖ	1	By there, Luke means the city of Lystra. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in Lystra” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2234	16:1	wxl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς	1	By believing, Luke means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2235	16:1	vh73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος	1	Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2236	16:2	t1lu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν.	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2237	16:2	rez2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2238	16:3	p6z8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν	1	It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2239	16:3	bdd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοῦτον	1	The demonstrative pronoun this one refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2240	16:3	za93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις	1	By those places, Luke means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2241	16:3	hk2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2242	16:3	pybf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ᾔδεισαν & ἅπαντες	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2243	16:4	n46i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διεπορεύοντο & παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun them refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going … they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2244	16:4	bu6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν	1	Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2245	16:4	gpi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2246	16:5	q8v9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2247	16:6	dhmn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διῆλθον & τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν, κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος λαλῆσαι τὸν λόγον ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia, they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2248	16:6	g97e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Φρυγίαν & Γαλατικὴν χώραν & τῇ Ἀσίᾳ	1	The word Phrygia is the name of a region in northwestern Asia Minor. See how you translated this name in 2:10. The word Galatian describes the region of Galatia in central Asia Minor. The word Asia is the name of a Roman province in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2249	16:6	qk0k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν	1	Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2250	16:6	ue3k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2251	16:6	d56g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2252	16:6	h4u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2253	16:7	b1xq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μυσίαν & Βιθυνίαν	1	The words Mysia and Bithynia are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2254	16:7	b539		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by the Spirit of Jesus, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2255	16:8	s6l1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέβησαν	1	Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy came down to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2256	16:8	xq6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	κατέβησαν	1	In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2257	16:9	cm2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διαβὰς	1	The man in the vision uses the phrase coming over because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “across the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2258	16:9	tzxh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις	1	Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2259	16:10	q0c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εἶδεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul had seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2260	16:10	fg5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says we and us because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2261	16:10	e884		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1	Luke is using the pronouns we and us to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2262	16:10	iu0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτούς	1	The pronoun them refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2263	16:11	q2pr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σαμοθρᾴκην & Νέαν Πόλιν	1	The word Samothrace is the name of an island, and the word Neapolis is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2264	16:11	ojte		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῇ δὲ ἐπιούσῃ εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the next day we sailed to Neapolis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2265	16:12	c8ox		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	κἀκεῖθεν εἰς Φιλίππους	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and from there we traveled overland to Philippi” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2266	16:12	thk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κολωνία	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by colony he means a Roman colony. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Philippi is a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2267	16:12	tl9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κολωνία	1	In the Roman empire, a colony was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2268	16:14	n952		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία & ἤκουεν	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain woman to introduce Lydia as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2269	16:14	se6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Λυδία	1	The word Lydia is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2270	16:14	qj86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πορφυρόπωλις	1	Luke is using the color of purple cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2271	16:14	c6n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Θυατείρων	1	The word Thyatira is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2272	16:14	cyk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν	1	Here the expression worshiping God means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in 10:2. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2273	16:14	rd4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically opened Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2274	16:14	s9ju		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	Here, the heart represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2275	16:14	a74y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2276	16:15	f38e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς & ἐβαπτίσθη	1	The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2277	16:15	g7e9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2278	16:15	lv50		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2279	16:15	s799		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	Here, her household refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2280	16:15	igcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	κεκρίκατέ	1	The word you is plural here. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2281	16:15	g8ul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2282	16:15	xnkk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2283	16:15	hkh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	Luke is using the pronoun us to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2284	16:16	ufy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2285	16:16	y1gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain young female slave to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2286	16:16	ymt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πνεῦμα Πύθωνα	1	Luke is describing the spirit that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python; it was a demonic spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2287	16:16	h2c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πύθωνα	1	The word Python is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2288	16:17	tni9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1	This woman is speaking as if salvation were a way or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2289	16:17	gsbj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2290	16:18	lj79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας & εἶπεν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned and said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2291	16:18	qi1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2292	16:18	u4z8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	In the ancient world, an hour was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes; it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2293	16:19	r1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν	1	The implication is that the masters could no longer profit from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2294	16:19	bws7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν	1	The marketplace was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2295	16:19	hf82		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας	1	The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas to the rulers in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2296	16:20	wn77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	The masters of the slave girl are referring to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2297	16:20	dkz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2298	16:21	gna6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν	1	The terms accept and practice mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2299	16:22	f03y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος	1	Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally rose up against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2300	16:22	r1gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & ἐκέλευον	1	The pronouns them and their refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2301	16:22	at6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2302	16:23	dsr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πολλάς & ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς	1	This is an idiomatic expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2303	16:23	la4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν	1	Luke is speaking when he says that the rulers threw them into prison. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2304	16:24	jug6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ξύλον	1	The word stocks describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing stocks for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2305	16:24	z12w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν	1	Luke is speaking when he says that the jailer threw them into the inner prison. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2306	16:26	q7z1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2307	16:26	m4ye		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	Luke is using one part of the prison, its foundations, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being shaken. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2308	16:26	s6mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠνεῴχθησαν & αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2309	16:26	p393		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2310	16:26	b540		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πάντων	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that by all he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2311	16:27	cwt5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν, νομίζων ἐκπεφευγέναι τοὺς δεσμίους	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that death was the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2312	16:27	viov		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2313	16:28	ljy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	By we, Paul means himself and the other prisoners but not the jailer, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2314	16:28	s2s2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please do not hurt yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2315	16:29	pe66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἰτήσας & φῶτα	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer called for lights because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2316	16:29	bb6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ	1	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “he knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2317	16:30	u132		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα σωθῶ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order for God to save me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2318	16:31	m801		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2319	16:31	f104		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	πίστευσον ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν καὶ σωθήσῃ	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe in the Lord Jesus, you will be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2320	16:31	br4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2321	16:31	w8ed		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκός σου	1	Here, your household refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2322	16:32	pq5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2323	16:32	ftg1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2324	16:33	gied		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς	1	Luke is using the term hour to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2325	16:33	r3la		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2326	16:34	v5fy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν	1	Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a table. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2327	16:35	lb4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in 16:16. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2328	16:36	qrw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοὺς λόγους	1	Luke is using the term words to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2329	16:36	f76u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ	1	The word go is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2330	16:36	noc2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2331	16:37	b4jm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς αὐτούς	1	The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says them and not just him, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2332	16:37	xmqz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτούς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν & ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1	The first instance of the pronoun them refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun they and the second instance of the pronoun them refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2333	16:37	v4yk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμᾶς	1	By us, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2334	16:37	qq1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν?	1	Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2335	16:37	b7cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ	1	The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2336	16:37	b5a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὔ γάρ	1	Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2337	16:37	jr2j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ, ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1	Paul is using the reflexive pronoun themselves for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2338	16:37	sw3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they lead us out” or “they should lead us out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
2339	16:37	x82d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν	1	It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2340	16:38	ldfi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	Luke is using the term words to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2341	16:38	ym2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were terrified that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2342	16:38	lqs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2343	16:39	q59h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς & ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων	1	The pronoun they refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun them refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2344	16:39	a7yq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς	1	Luke means implicitly that the magistrates entreated or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2345	16:40	y14i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word So to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2346	16:40	ylk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν Λυδίαν	1	Luke is referring to the house of Lydia by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2347	16:40	t1pf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	εἰσῆλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2348	16:40	ntc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2349	16:40	qs0x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	καὶ ἐξῆλθαν	1	Luke says that they … went out, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2350	16:40	gld6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἐξῆλθαν	1	Since Luke says they … went out, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2351	17:intro	gj4c				0	Acts 17 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica. Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea. Verses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens. Special Concepts in this Chapter The religion of Athens Paul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) As Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
2352	17:1	e4w5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2353	17:1	kll1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν	1	The words Amphipolis and Apollonia are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2354	17:1	o19x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	It might seem that the expression a synagogue of the Jews contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2355	17:2	mkn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς & αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun them refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2356	17:3	lt8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with and. The phrase fully opening them tells how Paul was demonstrating from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “by opening the Scriptures fully, demonstrating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2357	17:3	ir9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διανοίγων	1	Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally opening the Scriptures fully, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2358	17:3	ipb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστῆναι	1	Luke is using the word rise to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2359	17:3	b9qi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Luke is using the adjective dead as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2360	17:4	es2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2361	17:4	t21z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῶν & σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων	1	Here the expression worshiping God describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in 16:14. Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2362	17:4	ye8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐκ ὀλίγαι	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2363	17:5	clcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2364	17:5	ie1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῶν ἀγοραίων	1	The marketplace was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in 16:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2365	17:5	t3bc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν πόλιν	1	The word city represents the people of the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2366	17:5	w94p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰάσονος	1	Luke does not tell us anything further about this Jason, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2367	17:5	ks2l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰάσονος	1	The word Jason is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2368	17:5	abcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2369	17:6	i79p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τινας ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2370	17:6	x90b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες	1	The Jewish leaders are exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2371	17:8	ixmb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐτάραξαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2372	17:9	ya44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ ἱκανὸν	1	A bond was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2373	17:9	eq4y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	The pronoun they refers to the city officials, and the pronoun them refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2374	17:10	qy5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2375	17:10	m75m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	It might seem that the expression the synagogue of the Jews contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2376	17:11	k2st		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2377	17:11	alq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτοι & τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ	1	Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun these to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun those to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2378	17:11	gu6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εὐγενέστεροι	1	Luke is using the word noble, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2379	17:11	hle3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2380	17:11	uh8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2381	17:11	qrnm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ταῦτα	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2382	17:11	g8an		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2383	17:12	abcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2384	17:13	ybos		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ & κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2385	17:13	dijk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2386	17:13	wjq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	The terms exciting and troubling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2387	17:14	ael8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2388	17:14	zw1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν	1	It might seem that the expression as far as to the sea contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2389	17:15	gs1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2390	17:16	y9cr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2391	17:16	wk63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to Silas and Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Silas and Timothy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2392	17:16	u2th		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2393	17:16	s011		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2394	17:16	we78		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	Here the spirit represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2395	17:17	jkj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς σεβομένοις	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 16:14. Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2396	17:17	ec14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 16:19. Alternate translation: “in the public square” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2397	17:18	ru6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & δοκεῖ & εὐηγγελίζετο	1	The pronouns him, He, and he all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul … He seems … Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2398	17:18	l7le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Ἐπικουρίων	1	The word Epicurean is the name of a certain kind of philosopher. Epicureans believed that all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2399	17:18	f976		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Στοϊκῶν	1	The word Stoic is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal, loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2400	17:18	g4bv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὁ σπερμολόγος	1	These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2401	17:18	sx9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ξένων δαιμονίων	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new gods that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2402	17:19	unc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	The word Areopagus means “Hill of Ares” in Greek. It was named after the pagan god whose name was Ares in Greek and Mars in Latin. Luke does not explain the meaning of this word, since his readers already understand Greek. ULT spells this name the way it sounds in English. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also translate the meaning of the word and use the name “Mars Hill,” as UST does. Or you could spell the word the way it sounds and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Mars Hill” or “the Areopagus, that is, Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
2403	17:19	b56g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word Areopagus by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2404	17:19	aciu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή?	1	This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2405	17:19	g9gb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δυνάμεθα	1	By we, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2406	17:19	n250		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2407	17:20	lay8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ξενίζοντα & τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	The philosophers are speaking of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objects that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2408	17:20	us7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	The philosophers are referring to hearing by association with the ears, which people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2409	17:20	fs5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & βουλόμεθα	1	By our and we, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2410	17:20	fe4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι	1	The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2411	17:21	ujgi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce background information about the people of Athens that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2412	17:21	dn1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	Ἀθηναῖοι & πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι & ηὐκαίρουν	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners loved to devote their leisure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2413	17:21	d8yb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀθηναῖοι	1	The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2414	17:21	ij4e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν	1	Here, Luke says nothing other as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “made it their favorite leisure activity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2415	17:21	wr1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τι καινότερον	1	This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form newer with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2416	17:22	k5dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σταθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου ἔφη	1	If your language does not use the passive form having been stood, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Once the philosophers had stood Paul in the middle of the Areopagus, he was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2417	17:22	zq3y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου	1	As in 17:19, Luke uses the word Areopagus by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2418	17:22	h5et		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2419	17:22	kcag			δεισιδαιμονεστέρους	1	Paul is using the comparative form more religious for emphasis. Your language may use comparative forms in the same way. If not, you could convey the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very religious”
2420	17:22	ja1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	κατὰ πάντα	1	Paul says everything here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2421	17:23	cem7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ	1	While it would be preferable to present this as a direct quotation (see next note), you could translate this as an indirect quotation so that there is not one direct quotation within another. Alternate translation: “an altar whose inscription dedicated it to an unknown god” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2422	17:23	nmwv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ	1	Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2423	17:23	t3mu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2424	17:24	f2mz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς	1	Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2425	17:24	ju4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς	1	Paul is using one part of a person, the hand, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2426	17:25	e3dg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do hands of men care for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2427	17:25	cqri			προσδεόμενός τινος	1	Alternate translation: “as if he needed anything”
2428	17:25	yq68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων	1	Paul is using one part of a person, the hands, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2429	17:25	sj89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς διδοὺς	1	Paul is using the word himself for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2430	17:25	zv8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν	1	The terms life and breath mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2431	17:25	sw8d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πᾶσι	1	By all, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2432	17:26	p1e4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἑνὸς	1	By one, Paul implicitly means “one man.” He means Adam, the first person God created. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one man” or “Adam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2433	17:26	cnbu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “every nation of humanity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2434	17:27	s2xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν	1	Paul means implicitly that God did the things he described in the previous verse, giving the nations of humanity particular times to live in particular places, so that they would seek him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “God did this so that people would seek him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2435	17:27	jae5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν	1	Paul is speaking as if people could feel around for God and find him that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2436	17:27	p8hk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ	1	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2437	17:27	onm4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Paul is using the pronoun us to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2438	17:28	tkd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & γένος	1	The pronouns him and his refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2439	17:28	o4vy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ζῶμεν & ἐσμέν	1	Paul is using the pronoun we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2440	17:28	jxph		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν.	1	Here Paul is quoting from the Greek philosopher-poet Epimenides and from the Greek poets Aratus and Cleanthes. While it would be preferable to present these two quotations as direct quotations (see next note), you could translate them as indirect quotations so that there are not direct quotations within a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “For some of your own poets have said that in him we live and are moved and are and that we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2441	17:28	rpaz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν	1	Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2442	17:28	ii2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν	1	The expressions live and are moved and are mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “For he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2443	17:28	cbd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν	1	If your language does not use the passive form are moved, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For ‘he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2444	17:28	lil5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν.	1	Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s offspring or children. They are speaking and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2445	17:29	k9ws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is speaking as if people were literally God’s offspring or children. He means that God created people, and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2446	17:29	czi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ θεῖον	1	Paul is using the adjective Divine as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2447	17:29	xfp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ	1	Paul is referring to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2448	17:29	q4q2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου	1	Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human skill and imagination but to describe the qualities that people use to create images or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2449	17:29	gnk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1	Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2450	17:30	h8uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας	1	Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe times that were themselves ignorant but times when people were characterized by spiritual ignorance. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2451	17:30	qim5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2452	17:31	jt3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	Here the term world refers to the people who live in the world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2453	17:31	htp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by his own righteous standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2454	17:31	ebve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν	1	By the man, Paul implicitly means Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by Jesus, the man whom he has appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2455	17:31	l61p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πίστιν παρασχὼν πᾶσιν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of assurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having given everyone reason to believe surely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2456	17:31	ulr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2457	17:32	j44o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	Luke is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2458	17:32	tc8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀκουσόμεθά	1	By We, these philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2459	17:32	txre		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	καὶ πάλιν	1	It might seem that the expression also again contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “again” or “another time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2460	17:32	c4sm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory		0	This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2461	17:32	jlm5			ἀκούσαντες	1	These are the people who were present at the Areopagus, listening to Paul.
2462	17:32	sn6j			οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον	1	These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
2463	17:34	nb26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of what Paul did in Athens. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2464	17:34	nysg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τινὲς & ἄνδρες	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of Damaris shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2465	17:34	hlgu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	κολληθέντες αὐτῷ, ἐπίστευσαν	1	The people Luke describes here believed before they were joined to Paul, so it might be more natural to put the information about them believing first. Alternate translation: “believed and were joined to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2466	17:34	vcx3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κολληθέντες αὐτῷ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “joining him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2467	17:34	psh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης	1	The word Dionysius is the name of a man. The word Areopagite is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2468	17:34	hsz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δάμαρις	1	The word Damaris is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2469	18:intro	rky6				0	Acts 18 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth. Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey. Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel. Special Concepts in this Chapter The baptism of John Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
2470	18:1	fky7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	μετὰ ταῦτα	1	Luke is using the phrase After these things to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2471	18:1	abcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἦλθεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2472	18:2	d9zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καὶ εὑρών	1	The word found does not mean that Paul was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “And when Paul happened to meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2473	18:2	hm16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τινα Ἰουδαῖον	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain Jew to introduce Aquila as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there was a certain Jew there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2474	18:2	y97p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ποντικὸν	1	The word Pontian was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in 2:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2475	18:2	q11b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης	1	It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2476	18:2	n95f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κλαύδιον	1	The word Claudius is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in 11:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2477	18:5	r56h				0	General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
2478	18:5	btkg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθον	1	Luke says that Silas and Timothy came down to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2479	18:5	rjl6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2480	18:5	vwj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος	1	Luke speaks of the word as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2481	18:5	bsgm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος	1	Luke is using the term word to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2482	18:6	ncx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια	1	This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in 13:51. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2483	18:6	z12a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Here, blood represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2484	18:6	pacx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Paul is using one part of a person, the head, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2485	18:6	ezpo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	The word your is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2486	18:6	vwpg			τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of head. Alternate translation: “your heads”
2487	18:6	aq99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καθαρὸς ἐγώ	1	Paul is speaking as if he were physically clean. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2488	18:7	v8xg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τινὸς & σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν	1	See how you translated the similar expression in 16:14. Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2489	18:7	vs6y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τιτίου Ἰούστου	1	The words Titius Justus are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2490	18:8	lj2t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κρίσπος	1	The word Crispus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2491	18:8	zc89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2492	18:8	uaq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ	1	Here, house refers to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2493	18:8	t3np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2494	18:9	ws7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ φοβοῦ	1	Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not fear what people might do to him if he continues proclaiming the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Do not fear what people might do to you if you continue proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2495	18:9	l4yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ὁ Κύριος	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2496	18:9	zg8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	The expressions speak and do not be silent mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2497	18:9	a529		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not be silent about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2498	18:10	isn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ	1	Jesus is stating the pronoun I, which is already implied in the verb am, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2499	18:10	a8lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2500	18:11	a18w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2501	18:12	se8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γαλλίωνος	1	The word Gallio is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2502	18:12	f41k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Ἀχαΐας	1	The word Achaia was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2503	18:12	j762		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2504	18:12	lp79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατεπέστησαν	1	Here the expression rose up means that the Jewish leaders took action, specifically to oppose Paul. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2505	18:12	rc85			ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	The word unanimously indicates that the Jews in Corinth recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in 1:14. Alternate translation: “all together”
2506	18:12	u36c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα	1	The term judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio the governor sat when he made legal decisions in court. The implication is that the Jewish leaders wanted Gallio to judge and punish Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “brought him before the judgment seat so that the governor would judge and punish him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2507	18:13	xpnq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτος	1	The demonstrative pronoun this refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “This man Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2508	18:13	x23b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀνθρώπους	1	Although the term men is masculine, the Jewish leaders is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2509	18:13	il8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρὰ τὸν νόμον	1	By the law, the Jewish leaders implicitly mean “Roman law.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “contrary to Roman law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2510	18:14	uhyp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα	1	Luke is referring to “speaking” by association with a person would open his mouth in order to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2511	18:14	cesw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοὺς Ἰουδαίους	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2512	18:14	argm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ μὲν ἦν ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν	1	Gallio is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing on Paul’s part that brought you here today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2513	18:14	psxf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν	1	The terms crime and wrongdoing mean similar things. Gallio using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “some serious crime” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2514	18:15	reg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1	Gallio is speaking as if what follows was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker knows that it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2515	18:15	aaql		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	λόγου	1	By word, Gallio likely means speech, expressed in words, as opposed to action. He is saying that what Paul has been saying is not a matter of great importance if he has not actually committed any crime. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2516	18:15	p0kk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὀνομάτων	1	By names, Gallio likely means the question of whether Jesus can be called the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2517	18:15	ywpd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ὄψεσθε αὐτοί	1	Gallio is using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must see yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2518	18:15	royp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὄψεσθε αὐτοί	1	By see, Gallio means investigate the matter and resolve it. Your language may have a similar idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “you must see to it yourselves” or “you must look into it yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2519	18:16	d6nh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος	1	Here, judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2520	18:17	x9w5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σωσθένην	1	The word Sosthenes is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2521	18:17	ju3w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον	1	Since Luke says in 18:8 that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2522	18:17	mj77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος	1	This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2523	18:17	cyk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες & ἔτυπτον	1	Luke likely says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2524	18:18	j0we		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς	1	Luke is using the word But here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2525	18:18	et8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2526	18:18	x25w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κενχρεαῖς	1	The word Cenchreae is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2527	18:18	kq6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1	Paul cut the hair off his head to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut off his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2528	18:18	ceor		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1	Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a vow as the explanation for why he stayed yet many days in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, having stayed many days. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2529	18:18	cf3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1	Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add any information in your translation about why Paul made it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2530	18:18	c8z0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εὐχήν	1	This vow was a promise that a person in this culture made to God that he would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. A person might do this to express his sincerity about something he was praying for, to acknowledge something that God had done for him, or to consecrate himself to deeper devotion to God for a time. In your translation, you may be able to use the word for a comparable practice in your culture. Alternate translation: “made a special promise to God not to cut his hair for a time in order to be more devoted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2531	18:19	abcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun they refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun them refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2532	18:19	eqi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήντησαν & εἰς Ἔφεσον	1	Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila came down to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2533	18:20	u44s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐρωτώντων & αὐτῶν	1	The pronoun they refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2534	18:22	gyy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	Luke says that Paul had come down to Caesarea because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2535	18:22	bvw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀναβὰς	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by having gone up. he means that Paul traveled to Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having gone up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2536	18:22	r26z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναβὰς	1	Luke says that Paul had gone up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2537	18:22	q9j6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Luke is saying the church to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2538	18:22	n3rh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέβη	1	Luke says that Paul went down to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2539	18:23	plys		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν	1	Luke means that Paul visited in succession the churches in the region of Galatia and Phrygia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2540	18:23	s2hd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2541	18:24	xqy7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δέ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about Apollos that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2542	18:24	n2b4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Ἰουδαῖος & τις	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain Jewish man to introduce Apollos as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2543	18:24	gsal		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	Ἰουδαῖος	1	Luke is using the adjective Jewish as a noun to mean a person who is a Jew. ULT adds man to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2544	18:24	di14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρεὺς	1	The word Alexandrian is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in 6:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2545	18:24	qn7z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον	1	Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos came down to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2546	18:24	bh25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς	1	Luke is speaking of Apollos as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2547	18:25	ym5i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐλάλει καὶ ἐδίδασκεν	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word speaking tells how Apollos was teaching about Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he spoke, he taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2548	18:25	z7a8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2549	18:25	jj3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2550	18:25	jwol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2551	18:25	ift8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ζέων τῷ πνεύματι	1	Here the spirit represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2552	18:25	lr1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου	1	Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a baptism that John received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2553	18:26	ga6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2554	18:27	c2sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	βουλομένου & αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun he refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2555	18:27	ll36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	Luke uses the expression pass over here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2556	18:27	v2i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2557	18:27	f99p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2558	18:28	mw2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δημοσίᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word public, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2559	19:intro	g38y				0	Acts 19 General Notes Structure and Formatting Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there. Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there. Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made. Acts 19:20 is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book. Special Concepts in this Chapter Temple of Artemis The temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
2560	19:1	lp23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke is using the phrase And it happened that to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2561	19:1	rhv1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη	1	Luke says that Paul traveled through the upper parts of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than did the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia (18:23), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will (18:21). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2562	19:1	munb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατελθεῖν εἰς	1	Luke says that Paul came down to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2563	19:1	iosy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τινας μαθητάς	1	Luke is using the phrase certain disciples to introduce these believers as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there were already some believers in the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2564	19:2	wqi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε, πιστεύσαντες?	1	Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “And he asked them if they had received the Holy Spirit when they believed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2565	19:3	mrm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then what kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2566	19:3	jzp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα	1	The believers in Ephesus are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2567	19:3	w76v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ἰωάννου	1	By John, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2568	19:4	g8iw			Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα	1	Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism”
2569	19:4	r46y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2570	19:5	k9st		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2571	19:5	ueh1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2572	19:5	g2dm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the name of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2573	19:6	gk8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας	1	Paul laid his hands on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in 8:17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2574	19:6	udyf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	Luke is speaking as if the Holy Spirit physically came upon these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2575	19:6	j4n8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλάλουν & γλώσσαις	1	The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2576	19:7	e7kj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2577	19:8	qv8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπαρρησιάζετο	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was speaking boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2578	19:8	yky2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase reasoning tells how Paul was persuading people in the synagogue in Ephesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “reasonably persuading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2579	19:8	v8et		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2580	19:8	v5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was teaching that the kingdom of God had begun on earth when Jesus came as the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “about how, when Jesus came as the Messiah, God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2581	19:9	mq1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase being hardened tells how some in the Ephesus synagogue were disobeying what God wanted them to do, according to Paul’s teaching. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “stubbornly disobeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2582	19:9	yss2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσκληρύνοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were hardening themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2583	19:9	n6ir		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν ὁδὸν	1	As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in 9:2. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2584	19:9	den4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τυράννου	1	The word Tyrannus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2585	19:10	cw5g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people living throughout the province of Asia heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2586	19:10	t0ak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2587	19:10	n45g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2588	19:10	kj12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here, word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2589	19:11	abcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ τὰς τυχούσας	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2590	19:11	fa6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου	1	Luke is using one part of Paul, his hands, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2591	19:12	m3kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people even took handkerchiefs or aprons from Paul’s skin to the sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2592	19:12	vc1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια	1	This could mean implicitly: (1) that these were cloth items that others had placed on Paul’s skin. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that had touched Paul’s skin” (2) that these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that Paul had worn or used” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2593	19:12	aks4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σουδάρια	1	These handkerchiefs were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2594	19:12	xs31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	σιμικίνθια	1	These aprons were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2595	19:12	kw9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2596	19:12	nl3a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους	1	Luke is speaking of these illnesses as if they were living thing that could depart from a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2597	19:13	he2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δέ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2598	19:13	fgq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐξορκιστῶν	1	These exorcists were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2599	19:13	s12u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα	1	Here, name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2600	19:13	vqt1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	The exorcists are referring to Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2601	19:14	cwzb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δέ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about these seven sons of Sceva that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2602	19:14	emgz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἦσαν & τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain Jewish high priest to introduce his seven sons as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2603	19:14	cb8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σκευᾶ	1	The word Sceva is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2604	19:15	fhzn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθὲν & τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2605	19:15	lrky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By the evil spirit, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2606	19:15	nsl1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ?	1	The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2607	19:15	vqwh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑμεῖς & τίνες ἐστέ?	1	The evil spirit is stating the pronoun you, which is already implied in the verb are, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2608	19:16	lu7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀμφοτέρων	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2609	19:17	mx62		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2610	19:17	jodu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2611	19:17	fd5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2612	19:17	h0lq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	Luke is speaking of fear as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2613	19:17	w1su		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2614	19:17	j85h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2615	19:17	j2hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Here the word name stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2616	19:18	v9ib		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The phrase declaring tells how these believers were confessing the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2617	19:19	i31a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὰ περίεργα	1	Luke is using the adjective magical as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word arts to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2618	19:19	z9rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰς βίβλους	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word books refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2619	19:19	u9pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε	1	Each of these pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might say something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
2620	19:19	bcv2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney	ἀργυρίου	1	Each of the pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
2621	19:20	es71		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν	1	Luke is speaking of the way that the word of the Lord was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was increasing and prevailing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2622	19:20	lbg9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2623	19:20	t49m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2624	19:21	de4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2625	19:21	q18b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὡς & ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι & πορεύεσθαι	1	The word fulfilled conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2626	19:21	rdz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν	1	In this context, the word see means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2627	19:22	cy6f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἔραστον	1	The word Erastus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2628	19:23	nb3p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2629	19:23	rwf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in 19:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2630	19:24	cg16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις & ἀργυροκόπος & παρείχετο	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain silversmith to introduce Demetrius as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2631	19:24	opb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δημήτριος	1	The word Demetrius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2632	19:24	y5ae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	τις & ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος	1	Luke provides this background information about Demetrius to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2633	19:24	wg95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος	1	Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2634	19:24	nwt7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀργυροκόπος	1	A silversmith is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2635	19:24	p58m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2636	19:25	f8rm			οὓς συναθροίσας καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας, εἶπεν	1	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He gathered together the craftsmen, along with workers in similar occupations, and said”
2637	19:25	w1xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα	1	Luke is using the adjective such as a noun to mean a certain kind of work. ULT adds the word things to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “in similar occupations” or “who did similar crafts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2638	19:26	rm6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε	1	Demetrius is referring to perception by naming the two major means of perception. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you perceive clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2639	19:26	rx32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον	1	Demetrius is speaking as if Paul had physically removed a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2640	19:26	z7e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι	1	Demetrius is using one part of the artisans, their hands, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which people make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2641	19:27	j3bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people will consider the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2642	19:27	hz7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1	This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom people from all over the province of Asia and the world worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2643	19:27	aq5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1	Here the words Asia and the world refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2644	19:28	t4lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἔκραζον	1	The pronoun they refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2645	19:28	uc5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ	1	Luke is speaking of the craftsmen as if they were containers that anger filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2646	19:29	t7xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “confusion filled the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]);
2647	19:29	u42d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	Luke is speaking of the city as if they was a container that confusion filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2648	19:29	u51d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of confusion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2649	19:29	ej3q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸ θέατρον	1	The theater in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2650	19:29	d6r9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γάϊον & Ἀρίσταρχον	1	The words Gaius and Aristarchus are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2651	19:31	o6qt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν	1	The word Asiarchs is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2652	19:31	we87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & παρεκάλουν & ἑαυτὸν	1	The pronouns him and himself refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2653	19:31	r183		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον	1	The expression to give himself means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2654	19:33	ukaw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον	1	The implication is that some people instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone in the theater. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2655	19:33	jr85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλέξανδρον	1	The word Alexander is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2656	19:33	j1mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα	1	This likely means that Alexander was waving his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2657	19:33	tlq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ	1	The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2658	19:34	tyx6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπιγνόντες & ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν,	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2659	19:34	u1hp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς & κραζόντων	1	Luke is speaking as if the people in the theater collectively had only one voice. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2660	19:35	sy9m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὁ γραμματεὺς	1	This city clerk was a high official in the government of Ephesus. He was not merely someone who kept records. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “an alderman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2661	19:35	n4qz			φησίν	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
2662	19:35	gox9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2663	19:35	mtsc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τίς γάρ ἐστιν	1	The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2664	19:35	sd3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς?	1	The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2665	19:35	k8dy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2666	19:35	gqr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2667	19:35	zzmv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων	1	Although the term men is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2668	19:35	hiw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος	1	The term temple keeper was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2669	19:35	afd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1	The city clerk is using the adjective Zeus-fallen as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word image to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that this rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2670	19:35	fdfk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1	The word Zeus is the name of a pagan god. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2671	19:36	o0ul		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατεσταλμένους ὑπάρχειν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to calm down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2672	19:36	xj2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν	1	The city clerk means implicitly that it would be rash for the people to do anything to harm Gaius and Aristarchus, as he says in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to act impulsively and hurt the two men you have brought here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2673	19:36	s67q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word nothing and the negative adjective rash. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2674	19:37	cuhh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
2675	19:37	s8a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους	1	The pronoun these refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions (Acts 19:29). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2676	19:38	zkx5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον	1	The city clerk is using the term word to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2677	19:38	i14r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2678	19:38	szf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἀνθύπατοί	1	The proconsuls were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2679	19:38	o1vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
2680	19:38	g8tp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις	1	The pronoun them refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2681	19:39	hxh3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε	1	The word seek does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2682	19:39	wga5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2683	19:39	dsmg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται	1	The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
2684	19:39	et5j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	This regular assembly refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. In your translation, you could use a term for a comparable deliberative body in your culture. Alternate translation: “the town meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2685	19:40	sds7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, the context suggests that it would be the Roman authorities. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2686	19:40	efat		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τῆς σήμερον	1	The city clerk is leaving out a word that a sentence would ordinarily need in Greek in order to be complete. The clerk is abbreviating the expression “the today day,” which means “this day.” You can say that in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “this day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2687	19:40	up3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς σήμερον	1	The city clerk is referring to the events that were nearly a riot, by association with the day on which they took place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the events of this day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2688	19:40	jtdu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδενὸς αἰτίου ὑπάρχοντος, περὶ οὗ οὐ δυνησόμεθα ἀποδοῦναι λόγον	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there being no cause about which we will not be able to give an account.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “because we would have to have a reason in order to give an account” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2689	20:intro	u91c				0	Acts 20 General Notes Structure and Formatting In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem. Special Concepts in this Chapter Race Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]]) “Compelled by the Spirit” Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
2690	20:2	edb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὺς	1	The pronoun them refers to the believers in the regions of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2691	20:3	ah5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2692	20:3	bdq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	γνώμης τοῦ ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας.	1	The expression of a resolution means that Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved to return through Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2693	20:3	jypq			αὐτῷ & μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν	1	Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
2694	20:4	dw6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σώπατρος Πύρρου & Σεκοῦνδος, & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος	1	These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2695	20:4	dpyn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	Σώπατρος Πύρρου	1	Here, the possessive form indicates that Sopater is the son of Pyrrhus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2696	20:4	w4n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βεροιαῖος & Θεσσαλονικέων & Δερβαῖος & Ἀσιανοὶ	1	The word Berean is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word Thessalonians describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word Derbean is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word Asians describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2697	20:4	w8j6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀρίσταρχος & Γάϊος	1	The words Aristarchus and Gaius are the names of men. See how you translated these names in 19:29. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2698	20:5	y35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Luke begins to use the pronouns us and we to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words throughout this chapter if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2699	20:5	gb5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1	The pronoun they refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2700	20:5	o1bl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμᾶς	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says us because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2701	20:6	l5dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	The words Unleavened Bread are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several days. See how you translated this in 12:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2702	20:7	xsyv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular day of the week. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2703	20:7	wpfh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the believers met on the first of the week because that was the day Jesus rose from the dead. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week, when Jesus rose from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2704	20:7	tgsb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συνηγμένων ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2705	20:7	ls6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	The pronoun them refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2706	20:7	zff8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1	Luke could be using the word break to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2707	20:7	ckiy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1	By to break bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2708	20:7	j888		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2709	20:8	t6on		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἦσαν & λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι	1	The implication seems to be that it became warm in this upper room because there were many lamps lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2710	20:8	ak8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ὑπερῴῳ	1	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in 9:37. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2711	20:8	cshh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἦμεν συνηγμένοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2712	20:9	ju64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Εὔτυχος	1	The word Eutychus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2713	20:9	v5q7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος	1	This window was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2714	20:9	tsp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2715	20:9	abcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	Luke is speaking of sleep as if it were a living thing that could overcome Eutychus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2716	20:9	kh3h			τριστέγου	1	In this culture, the third story meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two stories above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers.
2717	20:9	jp89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤρθη νεκρός	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2718	20:9	z1wf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἤρθη νεκρός	1	The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they lifted him from the ground, but he had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2719	20:10	uban		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ θορυβεῖσθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2720	20:10	gfol		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ & ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1	Paul is speaking as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2721	20:11	w5w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος	1	Luke could be using the words broken and tasted to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2722	20:11	upkb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος	1	By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2723	20:11	av7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐξῆλθεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2724	20:12	lih8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of Eutychus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2725	20:12	jkj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν παῖδα	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by the boy, he means Eutychus. You can use his name if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Eutychus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2726	20:12	pk6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this comforted them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2727	20:12	abx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μετρίως	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2728	20:13	w4ew		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἡμεῖς δὲ, προελθόντες ἐπὶ τὸ πλοῖον, ἀνήχθημεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἆσσον, ἐκεῖθεν μέλλοντες ἀναλαμβάνειν τὸν Παῦλον; οὕτως γὰρ διατεταγμένος, ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν	1	If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Paul intended to go on foot to Assos and he arranged for us to take him on board there, so we went ahead to the ship and sailed away to Assos” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2729	20:13	q4yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ἆσσον	1	The word Assos is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2730	20:13	nq2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν	1	In light of what Paul says in 20:23, that the Holy Spirit was showing him that he would soon suffer and be imprisoned, the implication seems to be that Paul wanted to go on foot himself so that he could be alone for a while and reflect and pray. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “intending to go on foot himself because he wanted to have some time alone to reflect and pray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2731	20:14	ju8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μιτυλήνην	1	The word Mitylene is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2732	20:15	bbeq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατηντήσαμεν	1	Luke says that he and his traveling companions came down to a point on the mainland opposite Chios because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2733	20:15	ulk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Χίου	1	The word Chios is the name of an island in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2734	20:15	b6c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Σάμον	1	The word Samos is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2735	20:15	s7g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μίλητον	1	The word Miletus is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2736	20:16	p61e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι	1	Luke is speaking about time as if it were a commodity that a person could lose. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2737	20:17	nw52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	μετεκαλέσατο	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2738	20:18	xsa6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε ἀπὸ πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀφ’ ἧς ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν, πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην	1	It may be more natural in your language to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You yourselves know how I was with you the whole time from the first day from which I set foot in Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2739	20:18	b6li		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	Paul is stating the pronoun you, which is already implied in the verb know, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You certainly know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2740	20:18	vw6n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	Paul is using one part of himself, his foot, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2741	20:19	uidc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2742	20:19	llqj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης	1	Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great humility” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2743	20:19	pg86		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of humility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very humbly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2744	20:19	wh5m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	δακρύων	1	Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds tears of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2745	20:19	e6k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and how I endured the trials that happened to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2746	20:19	y5iw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2747	20:20	sscz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1	Paul says nothing here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2748	20:20	nu7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word nothing and the negative particle not. Alternate translation: “how I eagerly brought forth everything that would be useful so that I could declare it to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2749	20:21	sqf9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	διαμαρτυρόμενος & τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2750	20:21	w7mv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of repentance and faith, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about the need to repent towards God and believe in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2751	20:21	x552		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Paul is using the pronoun our to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2752	20:22	hcs0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Paul is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2753	20:22	vam4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2754	20:22	n99n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι	1	Paul is speaking as if the Spirit had bound him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2755	20:22	um41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς	1	Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
2756	20:22	a9j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῇ	1	The pronoun her refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2757	20:23	u26j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν	1	Luke is speaking as if these chains and sufferings were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2758	20:23	q3ie		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δεσμὰ	1	Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the chains that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire experience of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2759	20:24	cvw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐδενὸς λόγου ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ	1	Paul is using the term word to mean what he might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I do not consider my life to have any value for myself worth speaking of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2760	20:24	ga6d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	The terms race and ministry mean the same thing; race is figurative and ministry is literal. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could show how the second term is the literal equivalent of the first. Alternate translation: “to finish my race, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2761	20:24	m5gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul is speaking as if the ministry that Jesus gave him were a race he was running. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete my assignment, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2762	20:24	ljgc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	If you decide to use a plain expression rather than the figurative expression race, you could also use another way to express the emphasis that Paul is conveying by using two similar terms together. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2763	20:24	w8d2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul is speaking about this race and ministry as if they were objects that Jesus gave him and he received. He means that Jesus commanded him to do this ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that the Lord Jesus commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2764	20:24	hg3l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the good news that God graciously saves those who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2765	20:25	kj9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Paul is using the term behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2766	20:25	l59w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν βασιλείαν	1	Paul assumes that his listeners will understand that by kingdom he means the kingdom of God. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2767	20:25	aur9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν βασιλείαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God has begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2768	20:25	cq45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου	1	Paul is using one part of himself, his face, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2769	20:26	rab4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ	1	This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2770	20:26	e546		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1	Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2771	20:26	rs87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1	Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they would receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2772	20:27	g1vx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	In this verse, Paul is giving the reason why he is not responsible for any spiritual punishment the people in Ephesus might receive. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 26–27. It might say something like this: “I did not hold back from declaring all the counsel of God to you. Therefore I testify to you this very day that I am innocent of the blood of all of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
2773	20:27	qa9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι & ὑμῖν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb hold back. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2774	20:27	jl2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν	1	Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2775	20:28	u52d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is speaking as if the believers were a flock of sheep and the elders to whom he is speaking were their shepherds. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers whose leaders the Holy Spirit has made you, to care for the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2776	20:28	hjh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	Paul is referring to death by association with the way people may shed their blood when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the church of God, which he obtained through his own death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2777	20:28	cx69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	The word translated obtained means to make something one’s own. The pronoun he may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
2778	20:28	r66x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective own as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2779	20:28	ybzd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here the term church refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2780	20:29	ka6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται & λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου	1	Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a flock of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are vicious wolves. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2781	20:30	cbq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1	Paul is adding the word yourselves for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “From within your very own group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2782	20:30	esme		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦντες διεστραμμένα	1	In this context, arise means to take action to get an enterprise under way, not to get up from a sitting or lying position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men will begin to speak perverted things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2783	20:30	yn8u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διεστραμμένα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2784	20:30	ftf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν	1	Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically draw away people after them as they themselves left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follow their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2785	20:31	hs1m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative word stop. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2786	20:31	rvh6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds tears of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2787	20:31	rt1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν	1	Paul is using the two parts of a full day, night and day, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2788	20:31	fc3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν	1	Paul says night and day here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2789	20:32	zvz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ, τῷ δυναμένῳ	1	Paul is speaking of the word of God’s grace as if it were a living thing that was able to do the things he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to God who, through the word of his grace, is able” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2790	20:32	ylm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	Paul is using the term word to mean the message about God’s grace that Jesus and his apostles shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the message about his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2791	20:32	tbeo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the message about how God has graciously saved us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2792	20:32	s7rf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι	1	Paul is speaking as if these believers were a wall or building or other structure and the word of God’s grace was making them higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you more confident and mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2793	20:32	x5jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	Paul is speaking as if the blessings that God gives believers were money or property that a child inherits from a father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2794	20:32	sdlc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God has sanctified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2795	20:33	yw8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα	1	The implication is that Paul did not desire any of these things and did not try to get them by charging for his ministry to the Ephesians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I did not insist on being paid for my work” or “I did not try to become wealthy by teaching you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2796	20:33	o5jp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase no one and the negative word coveted. Alternate translation: “I served you freely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2797	20:33	yl6k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου	1	Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used silver and gold as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2798	20:33	ipq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ	1	In this culture, owning expensive clothing was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2799	20:34	f5a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε	1	Paul is adding the word yourselves for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2800	20:34	ja5v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ταῖς χρείαις μου & ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται	1	Paul is speaking of his hands as if they were a living thing that ministered to his needs, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2801	20:34	izuu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2802	20:35	zibu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι & δεῖ	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2803	20:35	pvrm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντα & ὅτι & δεῖ	1	Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently, that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2804	20:35	b6o1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πάντα	1	Paul is using the adjective all as a noun. ULT adds the word things to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2805	20:35	d1bh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might take hold of a person who was weak to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2806	20:35	tr1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν	1	Paul is adding the word himself for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2807	20:35	ps2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul is using the term words to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2808	20:35	mj5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2809	20:36	u3uc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ	1	Paul knelt down as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2810	20:37	pb4r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου	1	The expression falling upon means that the Ephesian elders put their arms around Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “embracing Paul” or “putting their arms around Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2811	20:37	sze4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατεφίλουν αὐτόν	1	To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in this culture. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “they were kissing him on the cheek to express their brotherly love for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2812	20:38	npay		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει	1	Luke is using the term word to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2813	20:38	bs3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1	In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his face, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2814	20:38	m0wr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he had spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2815	21:intro	gh1j				0	Acts 21 General Notes Structure and Formatting Acts 21:1–19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20–26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews. The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does. Special Concepts in this Chapter “They are all determined to keep the law” The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that. Nazarite vow The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23). Gentiles in the temple The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
2816	21:1	s3h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἤλθομεν	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun we (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2817	21:1	a428		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2818	21:1	e5y6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κῶ	1	The word Cos is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2819	21:1	p6ss		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥόδον	1	The word Rhodes is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea south of Cos. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2820	21:1	x7kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πάταρα	1	The word Patara is the name of a city on the southwest coast of Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2821	21:2	nz9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην	1	Luke is speaking of this ship as if it were a living thing that was crossing over the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2822	21:3	vkr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον	1	The expression leaving it behind on the port side means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2823	21:3	a429		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον	1	Luke says that he and his companions came down to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2824	21:3	a430		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐκεῖσε & τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2825	21:3	hwx8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	Luke is speaking of this ship as if it were a living thing that was unloading its own cargo. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2826	21:4	y35m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον	1	The pronoun who refers to the disciples in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2827	21:4	a431		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	The disciples were using one part of Paul, his foot, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2828	21:5	a432		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὅτε & ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας	1	Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they finished. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2829	21:5	a433		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντων	1	Luke says everyone here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2830	21:5	q8xl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι	1	The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2831	21:6	a434		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐκεῖνοι	1	The pronoun those refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2832	21:7	hy6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς & ἐμείναμεν	1	Here the word we refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2833	21:7	z4nt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πτολεμαΐδα	1	The word Ptolemais is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2834	21:7	ff1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2835	21:8	ay52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by the Seven, he means the seven men who were chosen in 6:5 to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2836	21:8	vi48		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics	τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ	1	Luke is using the title evangelist to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase preceded by a comma in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, a man known for proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics]])
2837	21:9	cv8b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information about the daughters of Philip that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2838	21:9	rcf4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	τούτῳ & ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες	1	The pronoun this refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2839	21:10	n3i8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	κατῆλθέν τις & προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain prophet to introduce Agabus as a returning participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing returning participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a prophet named Agabus who came down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2840	21:10	f9cb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἅγαβος	1	The word Agabus is the name of a man. See how you translated it in 11:28. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2841	21:10	a435		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατῆλθέν τις ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	Luke says that Agabus came down from Judea because that province is higher in elevation than Caesarea. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “arrived from up in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2842	21:11	a436		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου, δήσας ἑαυτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας	1	Agabus bound his own feet and hands with Paul’s belt as a symbolic action to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having taken the belt of Paul and bound his own feet and hands to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2843	21:11	nq2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that in this way the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt and that they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2844	21:11	i8u7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Agabus is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2845	21:11	s92d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν	1	Here, hands represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the custody of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2846	21:11	b59g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐθνῶν	1	Agabus is using the name of a whole group, the Gentiles, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2847	21:12	a437		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ ἐντόπιοι	1	Luke is using the adjective locals as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2848	21:12	a438		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς	1	Luke means implicitly that this urging included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2849	21:12	a439		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke says to go up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2850	21:13	uwt2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν?	1	Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2851	21:13	bj76		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally breaking his heart. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2852	21:13	k34w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	In this context, the heart represents the emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2853	21:13	p5e5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not only for them to bind me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2854	21:13	q35x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	This could mean: (1) that the name of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to the Lord Jesus” (2) that the name of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2855	21:14	hwc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ πειθομένου & αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were not persuading him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2856	21:14	zl98		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ πειθομένου	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand what he and the others were not persuading Paul about. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was not being persuaded not to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2857	21:14	as1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May the will of the Lord happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
2858	21:15	a440		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνεβαίνομεν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	Luke says that he and his traveling companions went up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring in your language to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2859	21:16	k9kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain early disciple to introduce Mnason as a new participant in the story. The phrase early disciple introduces him as one of the first people to believe in Jesus. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a Cypriot who was one of the first believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2860	21:16	zd9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μνάσωνί & Κυπρίῳ	1	The word Mnason is the name of a man. The word Cypriot is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in 11:20. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2861	21:16	a441		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2862	21:17	d3gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοί	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2863	21:20	a1hk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἱ & ἐδόξαζον & εἶπόν & αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun they refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2864	21:20	a442		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θεωρεῖς	1	Paul does not physically see these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2865	21:20	xki4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφέ	1	James and the elders using the term brother to mean someone who shares the same faith. Since this expression occurs in direct discourse, you may want to preserve it in your translation to show how these believers addressed one another. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2866	21:20	c5pu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὑπάρχουσιν	1	In this instance the pronoun they refers to the believing Jews whom James and the elders are describing. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these believing Jews are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2867	21:20	a443		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες ζηλωταὶ τοῦ νόμου ὑπάρχουσιν	1	James and the elders say all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they are very zealous for the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2868	21:21	pyg8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατηχήθησαν & περὶ σοῦ	1	James and the elders mean implicitly that people have been told this about Paul even though it is not true. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even though it is not true, they have been told about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2869	21:21	e5s4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηχήθησαν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2870	21:21	sdl3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with Moses, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2871	21:21	a444		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of apostasy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2872	21:21	knt4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish customs were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2873	21:21	u56t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	By the customs, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2874	21:22	a445		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τί οὖν ἐστιν	1	James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2875	21:22	a446		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν	1	James and the elders are using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2876	21:23	b28b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λέγομεν	1	As the General Notes to this chapter indicate, by we, James and the elders mean themselves but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2877	21:23	b22r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	εὐχὴν ἔχοντες	1	See how you translated the term vow in 18:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2878	21:23	a447		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	Some ancient manuscripts read from themselves. That would be indicating that these men made the vow on their own initiative. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “upon themselves.” That would be indicating that the men still needed to fulfill the commitment implicit in the vow to make an offering in the temple at the end of the time during which the conditions of the vow were in effect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2879	21:24	km4w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	James and the elders assume that Paul will know that in order to make an offering at the end of the time of their vows, these men will need to be made ceremonially clean so that they can go into the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “be purified with them so that you can all go to the temple area together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2880	21:24	a448		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἁγνίσθητι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “participate in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2881	21:24	c3ap		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς	1	James and the elders assume that Paul will know that the expenses at the end of a vow included buying a male and female lamb, a ram, grain, and wine for offerings. They also assume that Paul will know that the Jews considered paying such expenses for those who could not afford them to be an act of great piety. Alternate translation: “piously help them buy the animals and foods they will need for offerings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2882	21:24	abq6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν	1	The men would cut the hair off their heads to show that he had fulfilled the vows that they had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. See how you translated it in 18:18. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2883	21:24	a449		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν	1	Even though James and the elders are using the future tense, they are actually stating the purpose for which Paul would be purified with these four men and pay their expenses. Use a natural way in your language for expressing a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that they may shear their heads” or “so that they will be able to shear their heads to show that they have fulfilled their vows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2884	21:24	a450		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέν ἐστιν	1	The expression there is nothing in these things means that they are not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things they have been told about you are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2885	21:24	nu9v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2886	21:24	a451		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον	1	James and the elders are using the word yourself for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2887	21:25	a452		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς	1	James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2888	21:25	bpb5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν	1	James and the elders are using the adjectives idol-sacrificed and strangled as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2889	21:25	wjd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν	1	James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2890	21:25	nu0i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πνικτὸν	1	God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2891	21:26	cr14		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοὺς ἄνδρας	1	Luke implicitly means the four men who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2892	21:26	a453		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἁγνισθεὶς	1	Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2893	21:26	s8z9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἁγνισθεὶς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having participated in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2894	21:26	xu9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἱερόν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2895	21:26	a454		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ	1	Luke is using the possessive form the days of purification to mean the days during which the men’s vows were in effect, at the end of which there needed to be a purification ceremony. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2896	21:26	a455		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of purification, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2897	21:26	pvy3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ	1	In this case Luke is referring implicitly to a separate purification process from the one the men fulfilled in order to enter the temple area. He means the purification process that came at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of the days of purification at the end of their vows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2898	21:26	gc23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ἡ προσφορά	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until each one of them offered an offering for himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2899	21:27	j9zm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he means the seven days that were customarily required for the offerings and purification ceremony at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the seven days that it took to purify these men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2900	21:27	a456		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke implicitly means some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival, as described in 20:16. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2901	21:27	k4l1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2902	21:27	a457		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον	1	Luke says whole here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making many people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2903	21:27	a458		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸν ὄχλον	1	By the crowd, Luke implicitly means the crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem from all over the Roman Empire for the Pentecost festival. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2904	21:27	mks6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	The expression laid hands on means to arrest or detain someone, by association with the way that arresting officers or concerned citizens might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they held onto him” or “they detained him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2905	21:28	a459		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2906	21:28	a460		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντας πανταχῇ	1	The Jews from Asia are saying all and everywhere as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2907	21:28	sfg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου	1	The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that they are referring to the special status of the people of Israel as God’s chosen people, the law of Moses, and the temple in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and the law of Moses and this temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2908	21:28	jc9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple and that they are accusing Paul of bringing Greeks into those areas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “into areas of the temple courtyard where they are not allowed to go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2909	21:28	a461		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ἱερὸν	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2910	21:29	t2z7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge		0	In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid their hands on him, shouting, ‘Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
2911	21:29	h1uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τρόφιμον	1	The word Trophimus is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in 20:4. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2912	21:30	st3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	Here, the word city means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2913	21:30	upl8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	Luke says the whole here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2914	21:30	a462		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2915	21:30	a463		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says the temple here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2916	21:30	mmaa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2917	21:30	xd6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	The implication is that the gatekeepers shut the doors to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2918	21:31	a464		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ζητούντων τε αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι	1	The pronoun they refers to the mob, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as the mob was seeking to kill Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2919	21:31	d6vt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης	1	Luke is speaking of this report as if they were a living thing that came up to the commander on its own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2920	21:31	hu5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης	1	Luke uses the phrase **came up ** because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard up in the temple fortress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2921	21:31	p85a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης	1	A chiliarch was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 1,000 soldiers. A cohort was a large military guard unit. Alternate translation: “to the commander of the military guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2922	21:31	u65r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Here, the word Jerusalem means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were agitated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2923	21:31	zgas		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were very agitated” or “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were rioting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2924	21:31	a465		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “something was greatly agitating the people who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2925	21:32	j81t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς ἐξαυτῆς παραλαβὼν στρατιώτας καὶ ἑκατοντάρχας, κατέδραμεν ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	The pronoun who refers to the chiliarch (the Roman commander), and the pronoun them refer to the people who were rioting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The commander immediately took soldiers and centurions and ran down to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2926	21:32	e4rj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἑκατοντάρχας	1	A centurion was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. See how you translated it in 10:1. Alternate translation: “their commanding officers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2927	21:33	xd9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι ἁλύσεσι δυσί	1	These means implicitly that the commander ordered his soldiers to chain Paul to one soldier on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “commanded him to be chained to one soldier on each side of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2928	21:33	zi4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2929	21:33	y6zw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was asking, ‘Who is this? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2930	21:33	fi22		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐπυνθάνετο	1	Luke means implicitly that the commander was asking the people in the crowd these questions, not that he was asking them of Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was asking the people in the crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2931	21:34	k35e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun he refers to the commander, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander … Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2932	21:34	a466		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀσφαλὲς	1	Luke is using the adjective certain as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth about Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2933	21:34	qcc6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2934	21:35	h9n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers carried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2935	21:35	a467		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν βίαν τοῦ ὄχλου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of violence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the crowd was so violent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2936	21:36	kax6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	αἶρε αὐτόν	1	The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a mild way of referring to this in your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2937	21:37	j9xk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μέλλων & εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress, Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2938	21:37	a468			ὁ Παῦλος λέγει	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said”
2939	21:37	a469		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ?	1	Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2940	21:37	p5cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις?	1	The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2941	21:38	xx2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων?	1	The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be the Egyptian he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the 4,000 men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2942	21:38	p2ym		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	τῶν σικαρίων	1	The term Sicarii is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
2943	21:39	a470		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ταρσεὺς	1	The word Tarsian is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2944	21:39	a471		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης	1	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2945	21:39	a139		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἐπίτρεψόν μοι	1	This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase I ask of you shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2946	21:40	qp2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐπιτρέψαντος & αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun he refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2947	21:40	rk1y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2948	22:intro	gq5g				0	Acts 22 General Notes Structure and Formatting This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26) Special Concepts in this Chapter “In the Hebrew language” Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen.
2949	22:1	lrs0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2950	22:1	xe46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	Paul is using the word brothers to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is using the word fathers to refer either to Jewish leaders who may be present or to Jewish men who are older than he is. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” or “My fellow Israelites young and old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2951	22:1	pe8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen as I explain myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2952	22:2	a472		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μᾶλλον παρέσχον ἡσυχίαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of quietness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they became even more quiet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2953	22:3	a473		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γεγεννημένος ἐν Ταρσῷ τῆς Κιλικίας	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a native of Tarsus of Cilicia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2954	22:3	d4dx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος	1	Paul is using the phrase at the feet to refer to Gamaliel himself by association with the way a student in this culture would sit at the feet of a teacher (that is, on the ground in front of a teacher) while learning from him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but educated in this city by Gamaliel, instructed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2955	22:3	g311		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could state this using active forms. It may be helpful to begin new sentences here. Alternate translation: “However, Gamaliel educated me in this city. He instructed me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2956	22:3	b1dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Γαμαλιήλ	1	The word Gamaliel is the name of the man who was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law at this time. See how you translated his name in 5:34. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2957	22:3	iz4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of strictness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the most strict interpretation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2958	22:3	lqk7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πατρῴου	1	Peter is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2959	22:3	dbl4			καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον	1	Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way that all of you are today”
2960	22:4	dr8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα ἄχρι θανάτου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who persecuted this Way to the point of killing those who belonged to it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2961	22:4	a474		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὃς & ἐδίωξα	1	Paul is using the pronoun who to refer to himself. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I persecuted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2962	22:4	jy3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	Here, this Way represents the people who belonged to the group called the Way. Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to the group called the Way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2963	22:4	bk4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in 9:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2964	22:5	v2km		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	μαρτυρεῖ μοι	1	Paul is speaking politely of the high priest as if it may be assumed that he will willingly testify to what he knows to be true. Use a form in your language that implicitly suggests good will on the part of someone. Alternate translation: “will tell you about me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2965	22:5	a475		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ πρεσβυτέριον	1	Paul is referring to the Sanhedrin by association with the way it was composed of the elders of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2966	22:5	in72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2967	22:5	y82b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἄξων & τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	If your language does not use the passive form bound, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to bind those who were there and bring them back to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2968	22:5	ht9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that they might receive punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2969	22:6	w4l7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2970	22:7	a476		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις?	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “someone addressing me by name and asking me why I was persecuting him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2971	22:7	d6nd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	Paul is using one part of this speaker, his voice, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2972	22:7	a477		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2973	22:8	a478		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὃν σὺ διώκεις	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2974	22:8	a479		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τίς εἶ, κύριε	1	Paul was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was Lord. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2975	22:9	h95h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὴν & φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν	1	In this context the word hear likely means “understand,” since Luke says in 9:7 that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2976	22:10	a480		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2977	22:10	a91a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σοι λαληθήσεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2978	22:10	a481		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πάντων ὧν τέτακταί	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2979	22:11	n1kb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because that light was so bright” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2980	22:11	qyf0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the ones being with me leading me by the hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2981	22:11	a482		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	ἦλθον	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “I went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2982	22:12	a17q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς	1	Paul is using the phrase a certain devout man to introduce Ananias as a new participant in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2983	22:12	e7uw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom all the Jews there attested” or “of whom all the Jews there spoke well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2984	22:13	a483		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπέν μοι, Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ, ἀνάβλεψον	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “addressed me as a brother and told me to look up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2985	22:13	un4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Ananias was using the word brother as a title for Saul. The two men were not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias was already addressing Saul as someone who shared the same faith. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word “brother” is used in 3:17 and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2986	22:13	a484		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἀνάβλεψον	1	In one sense, this was not a command that Paul was capable of obeying, since he could not see. Instead, it was a command that directly caused him to be healed, if he would look up as if he could see. Alternate translation: “if you look up, you will be able to see” or see next note for another possibility. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
2987	22:13	x3kc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνάβλεψον	1	The expression look up can also mean “see again,” that is, to have one’s sight restored. If this is the meaning, then Ananias was telling Paul what Jesus was going to do for him. Alternate translation: “Jesus is restoring your sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2988	22:13	se47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	In the ancient world, an hour was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right at that instant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2989	22:13	x4s0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κἀγὼ & ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν	1	Paul means implicitly that when he looked up at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2990	22:14	a485		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2991	22:14	a486		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων	1	Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2992	22:14	a487		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸν Δίκαιον	1	Ananias is using the adjective Righteous as a noun to mean a particular person who is righteous. ULT adds the word one to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the One who is righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2993	22:14	a488		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸν Δίκαιον	1	Ananias is referring to the Messiah by association with the way the Messiah was Righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2994	22:14	dg8q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	It might seem that the expression the voice from his own mouth contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “his own voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2995	22:15	a489		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ὅτι ἔσῃ μάρτυς αὐτῷ πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους, ὧν ἑώρακας καὶ ἤκουσας	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation, continuing from the previous verse: “because I would be a witness for him to all men of what I had seen and heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2996	22:15	i5q8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους	1	Although the term men is masculine, Ananias was using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2997	22:16	a490		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ νῦν τί μέλλεις? ἀναστὰς, βάπτισαι καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου, ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He asked me why I was delaying, and he told me to arise and be baptized and wash away my sins, calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2998	22:16	bhg9			καὶ νῦν	1	Here, now does not mean “at this moment”; Ananias is using the term to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So listen”
2999	22:16	a491		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	Here the term arising means that Ananias wanted Paul to take action, not that he wanted him to stand up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Come on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3000	22:16	lt2i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βάπτισαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3001	22:16	zr5p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου	1	Ananias is speaking as if Paul could literally wash away his sins. He is using a word picture to convey his meaning. He means that just as washing one’s body removes dirt, if Paul repents and asks Jesus for forgiveness, Jesus releases him from the guilt and power sin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to show that you are asking Jesus to free you from sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3002	22:16	g5dq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	Here, name represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “calling on him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3003	22:16	a492		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	By his name, Ananias implicitly means the name of Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3004	22:17	its2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3005	22:18	a493		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι, σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει ἐξ Ἰερουσαλήμ, διότι οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I saw him telling me to hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem because they would not accept my testimony about him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3006	22:18	jy2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun him refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3007	22:18	a494		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει	1	The expressions Hurry and in haste mean similar things. Jesus was using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Go away as fast as you can” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3008	22:19	a495		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	κἀγὼ εἶπον, Κύριε, αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται ὅτι ἐγὼ ἤμην φυλακίζων καὶ δέρων κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς, τοὺς πιστεύοντας ἐπὶ σέ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I told the Lord that they themselves knew that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues those who believed in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3009	22:19	q5cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1	The pronouns they themselves refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews here in Jerusalem who do not believe in you know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3010	22:19	im4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1	Paul is adding the word themselves for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “they know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
3011	22:20	a496		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ὅτε ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἤμην ἐφεστὼς, καὶ συνευδοκῶν, καὶ φυλάσσων τὰ ἱμάτια τῶν ἀναιρούντων αὐτόν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I told him that when the blood of Stephen his witness was spilled, I myself was also standing by and agreeing and guarding the outer garments of the ones killing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3012	22:20	udrd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, recall from chapter 7 that it was the enemies of Stephen. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness spilled his blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3013	22:20	y7t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1	Paul is referring to Stephen’s death by association with the way his blood was spilled when his enemies killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3014	22:21	a497		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ εἶπεν πρός με, πορεύου, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἰς ἔθνη μακρὰν ἐξαποστελῶ σε	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he told me to go because he would send me far away to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3015	22:22	a498		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τούτου τοῦ λόγου	1	This could mean: (1) that the crowd became upset when they heard the specific word “Gentiles.” Alternate translation: “they heard the word ‘Gentiles’” (2) that the term word means what Paul said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul says this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3016	22:22	a499		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες	1	Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Jerusalem literally lifted up its voice. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3017	22:22	a500			τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of “lifting up a voice” but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one voice, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices”
3018	22:22	ta8z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον	1	The crowd is referring to Paul’s death by association with the way they would remove him from the earth if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3019	22:22	a501		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐ & καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν	1	The crowd meant implicitly that it was not right for Paul to live even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3020	22:23	b6a7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια	1	When the people in the crowd removed their outer garments, this was at least a symbolic action indicating that they felt they should stone Paul to death. They took off their long robes as they would have done in order to throw stones at Paul more easily. But some of the people may actually have intended to try to stone Paul even though he was in the custody of the Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “casting off their outer garments as if they were going to throw stones at Paul to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3021	22:23	a502		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα	1	This could mean: (1) that the people in the crowd were throwing dust into the air to symbolize how they wanted to throw stones at Paul, who was on the steps above them. Alternate translation: “throwing dust into the air as if they were throwing stones at Paul” (2) that the people in the crowd were doing this to demonstrate how angry they were. Alternate translation: “angrily throwing dust into the air” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3022	22:24	h6gp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν & εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3023	22:24	sth6			τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in 21:34.
3024	22:24	og3n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3025	22:24	pz47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	The commander did not want scourges to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments, scourges, that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3026	22:24	a503		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	μάστιξιν	1	The term scourges describes leathern thongs that had small pieces of metal attached to them to inflict more damage. Your language may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “by whips” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3027	22:25	ar63		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	προέτειναν	1	The pronoun they refers to the soldiers who were going to whip Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3028	22:25	a504		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν ἑστῶτα ἑκατόνταρχον ὁ Παῦλος, εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν?	1	Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the centurion who was standing by whether it was lawful for him and his soliders to scourge a man who was a Roman and had not been condemned.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3029	22:25	yjw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν?	1	Paul is using the question form to challenge the right of the centurion and his soldiers to whip him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman citizen and who is uncondemned!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3030	22:25	a505		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον	1	In this context, the term Roman implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “a man who is a Roman citizen and who has not been condemned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3031	22:26	pca7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?	1	The centurion is using the question form to warn the commander that he should not have Paul whipped. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3032	22:26	a506		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?	1	The centurion is speaking of the commander, one person who was involved in having Paul whipped, to mean everyone who was involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3033	22:26	a507		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ῥωμαῖός	1	As in the previous verse, here the term Roman implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3034	22:27	pe31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ & ὁ	1	The pronouns them, him, and he refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3035	22:28	dr2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	The commander is saying implicitly that he does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3036	22:28	r79c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of citizenship, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying a large sum of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3037	22:28	a508		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3038	22:28	rly1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed have been a citizen since birth” or “I indeed inherited citizenship from my father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3039	22:29	a509		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθη	1	The implication is that the commander was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3040	22:30	a510		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἀσφαλὲς	1	Luke is using the adjective certain as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3041	22:30	kx58		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔλυσεν αὐτόν	1	This means implicitly not that the commander released Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3042	23:intro	gbw5				0	Acts 23 General Notes Structure and Formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5. Special Concepts in this Chapter Resurrection of the dead The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) “Called a curse” Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter Whitewash This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3043	23:1	lrs1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3044	23:1	lrs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Paul is using the word brothers to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3045	23:1	nn2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ	1	Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3046	23:2	yz4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in 5:1 and 9:10. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3047	23:2	a565		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα	1	Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his mouth that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3048	23:3	igq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε	1	Paul is referring to the way a wall can be painted white to make it look clean. Paul was suggesting that, in the same way, Ananias appeared to look morally innocent, but he was really full of evil intent. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you who pretend to be good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3049	23:3	un7g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι?	1	Paul is using the question form to challenge Ananias for what he has done. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not sit judging me by the law while acting contrary to the law by commanding me to be struck!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3050	23:3	m6nb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “command someone to strike me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3051	23:4	lkh8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς?	1	The men standing by Paul are using the question form to rebuke him for saying what he said. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not insult the high priest of God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3052	23:5	a511		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3053	23:5	a512		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται γὰρ, ὅτι ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “For it is written that we should not speak evil of a ruler of our people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3054	23:5	e8lg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3055	23:5	a513		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς	1	Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must not speak evil of a ruler of your people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
3056	23:6	a514		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τὸ ἓν μέρος	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one part of the council” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3057	23:6	a515		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3058	23:6	pbe1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3059	23:6	as3f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	υἱὸς Φαρισαίων	1	By son, Paul means both that he is the literal son of a Pharisee and that he is the descendant of a line of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3060	23:6	a516		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word resurrection describes what the Pharisees had hope for. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “the hope of the resurrection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
3061	23:6	iz18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the hope that God will make the dead alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3062	23:6	dchr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3063	23:6	ys5k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3064	23:8	gl1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	γὰρ	1	Luke uses the word For to introduce background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3065	23:8	a517		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there is no resurrection and that there are no angels and no spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3066	23:8	lrs2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ ἀμφότερα	1	By both, Luke means implicitly that Pharisees believe in (1) the resurrection and (2) angels and spirits. You could indicate this explicitly if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “both that there is a resurrection and that there are angels and spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3067	23:9	a519		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἀναστάντες	1	By arising (that is, standing up), these Pharisees were indicating that they had something important to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3068	23:9	ayr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος	1	These Pharisees are speaking as if what they are saying is a hypothetical possibility, but they believe that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
3069	23:9	a520		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος	1	These Pharisees assume that the Sadducees will understand that they mean this spirit or angel spoke to Paul when he had the vision in the Jerusalem temple that he described in 22:17–21. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel, when he had his vision in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3070	23:9	a521		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος?	1	These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3071	23:10	f568		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they tear Paul apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3072	23:10	tqhu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	μὴ διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	Luke is making an overstatement here to emphasize the danger that Paul was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “lest they cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3073	23:11	i9w5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῇ & ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ	1	This expression indicates the night after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3074	23:11	a522		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ὁ Κύριος	1	Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3075	23:11	r4q4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι	1	Jesus assumes that Paul will know that he means Paul will testify about him in Rome. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3076	23:12	a523		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3077	23:12	g3sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς	1	The implication is that the curse was, “May God do so to us if we eat or drink until we have killed Paul,” that is, “May God kill us.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “asked God to kill them if they did not do what they swore to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3078	23:12	a524		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	λέγοντες μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωσιν τὸν Παῦλον	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘We will neither eat or drink until we have killed Paul’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3079	23:14	a525		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς	1	It might seem that the expression cursed ourselves with a curse contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “cursed ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
3080	23:14	a526		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι	1	Since the men actually swore that they would eat or drink nothing, they are using one part of their oath to represent all of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat and drink nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3081	23:15	u8xm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	By we, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3082	23:15	a527		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἐμφανίσατε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
3083	23:16	a531		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκούσας & τὴν ἐνέδραν	1	Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the ambush. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3084	23:16	w6fe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship	ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου	1	Luke does not tell us whether this sister was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or “the nephew of Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
3085	23:17	a528		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative	ἄπαγε	1	This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please take” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
3086	23:18	abd0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ὁ & παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν	1	The pronoun him refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun he refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3087	23:18	lrs3			φησίν	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
3088	23:19	a530		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	The chiliarch taking hold of the hand of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a private location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3089	23:20	uv6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, The Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3090	23:21	a532		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σὺ & μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3091	23:21	a533		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν	1	By the word promise, Paul’s nephew is referring to the commander agreeing to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin the next day and actually bringing him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3092	23:22	a534		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	παραγγείλας, μηδενὶ ἐκλαλῆσαι ὅτι ταῦτα ἐνεφάνισας πρὸς ἐμέ	1	Here Luke begins an indirect quotation but finishes it as a direct quotation. It may be more natural in your language for the entire quotation to be either indirect or direct. Alternate translation: “commanding him to tell no one that he had reported these things to him” or “commanding him, ‘Tell no one that you have reported these things to me’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3093	23:23	mgi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	δεξιολάβους διακοσίους	1	Alternate translation: “200 soldiers who are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3094	23:23	kg8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός	1	In your translation, you may wish to express this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock this evening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3095	23:24	a535		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	κτήνη τε παραστῆσαι, ἵνα ἐπιβιβάσαντες τὸν Παῦλον, διασώσωσι πρὸς Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα,	1	Here Luke finishes as an indirect quotation the direct quotation that began in the previous verse. It may be more natural in your language to continue and finish the quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “and provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3096	23:24	a536		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	διασώσωσι	1	The pronoun they refers to the soldiers, horsemen, and spearmen described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these troops may bring him safely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3097	23:24	av3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φήλικα	1	The word Felix is the name of the man who was the Roman governor of Judea at this time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3098	23:25	a537		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γράψας ἐπιστολὴν	1	Luke means implicitly that the commander gave the instructions described in the previous two verses by “summoning” two centurions and writing the letter quoted in verses 26–30. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He also wrote a letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3099	23:26	zf93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι	1	The commander begins this letter by speaking about himself and about the person to whom he is writing in the third person. That was the convention in this culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first and second persons to translate this. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to you, the most excellent Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3100	23:26	yk79		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1	As was also the convention in this culture, the letter-writer leaves it unstated but understood that he is writing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply those words. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3101	23:26	vg8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας	1	The words Claudius Lysias are the name of the commander. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3102	23:26	u2ih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι	1	The expression most excellent was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to the Honorable Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3103	23:27	yy0e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων, καὶ μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν & ἐξειλάμην	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Learning that the Jews had seized this man and that they were about to kill him … I rescued him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3104	23:27	zr7l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	The commander is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3105	23:27	a538		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Ῥωμαῖός	1	Here the term Roman implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3106	23:28	a539		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	κατήγαγον	1	The commander says that he took Paul ** down** to the Sanhedrin because he brought him down the steps from the Roman fortress to the temple courtyard. It may not be necessary to reproduce this detail in your translation. Alternate translation: “I brought him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
3107	23:29	zt4f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν; μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I found that the Jews were accusing him about questions of their law, but they were not accusing him of anything worthy of death or chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3108	23:29	wsh2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν	1	The commander is using the word death to mean a penalty of death. He is referring to imprisonment by association with the way that the Romans used chains to secure prisoners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “execution or imprisonment” or “of being put to death or being put in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3109	23:30	i2ji		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μηνυθείσης & μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3110	23:31	ny4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3111	23:31	ifs1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα	1	The word Antipatris is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3112	23:32	abd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ, ὑπέστρεψαν	1	The pronoun they refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3113	23:33	abx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ	1	The pronoun who refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3114	23:34	dtx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3115	23:35	mga2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κελεύσας & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3116	24:intro	j74u				0	Acts 24 General Notes Structure and Formatting Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do. Special Concepts in this Chapter Respect Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2–4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter Governmental leaders The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3117	24:1	a540		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός	1	Luke is using the phrase a certain orator to introduce Tertullus as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
3118	24:1	f3vx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ῥήτορος	1	In this context, the term orator means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3119	24:1	xm6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Τερτύλλου τινός	1	The word Tertullus is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3120	24:1	a541		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατέβη	1	Luke says that these men came down to Caesarea because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring to traveling downward in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3121	24:2	a542		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κληθέντος & αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3122	24:2	a543		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	κατηγορεῖν	1	The pronoun him refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3123	24:2	e6zg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τυγχάνοντες	1	By we, Tertullus means himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3124	24:2	qw1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	σοῦ & σῆς	1	Here the words you and your refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3125	24:2	a544		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ	1	Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by this people he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3126	24:3	a545		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντῃ & πανταχοῦ & πάσης	1	Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3127	24:3	q3fj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	κράτιστε Φῆλιξ	1	The expression most excellent was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in Acts 23:26. Alternate translation: “Your Excellency, Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3128	24:3	r5jl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word thankfulness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very gratefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3129	24:4	tyq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	By us, Tertullus means himself and the Jewish leaders on whose behalf he is speaking. He does not mean Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking. So use the exclusive form of “us” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3130	24:4	a546		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fairness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “briefly, knowing that you will judge our case fairly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3131	24:5	i1qs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λοιμὸν	1	Tertullus is speaking as if Paul was literally spreading disease. He means that Paul is causing trouble. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a troublemaker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3132	24:5	k1v1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	Tertullus says this as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain this overstatement in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3133	24:5	zg4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῶν Ναζωραίων	1	In this context, the word Nazarenes is a name that people used at this time to describe believers in Jesus. Jesus himself was known as a Nazarene because he came from the town of Nazareth. See how you translated the same word in 2:22, where it has that meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3134	24:6	a547		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ὃν καὶ ἐκρατήσαμεν	1	Tertullus is making the case that Paul is a criminal, but he is leaving it up to Felix to decide what Paul’s punishment should be, so he is deliberately breaking off this sentence here. If this might be unclear to your readers, you could indicate his meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “whom we also arrested, and who deserves to be punished, but we will leave it to you to decide his punishment.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3135	24:6	a548		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants		0	As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of verse 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3136	24:8	a549		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρ’ οὗ	1	The pronoun whom refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “From him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3137	24:9	rq5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who had come to Caesarea to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3138	24:11	a550		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ πλείους εἰσίν μοι ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς	1	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it was only 12 days ago that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3139	24:12	my1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	εὗρόν	1	The pronoun they refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jews who are accusing me found” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3140	24:14	k79p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, the Way was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in 9:2. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3141	24:14	a551		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἐν τοῖς προφήταις γεγραμμένοις	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3142	24:14	a552		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τοῖς προφήταις	1	The word Prophets is the name of a section of the Bible that contains the books in which the prophets recorded the messages that God gave them. Alternate translation: “the books that the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3143	24:15	nv5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὗτοι	1	The pronoun these refers to the Jewish leaders who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “my accusers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3144	24:15	qza8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that God will make both the righteous and the unrighteous alive again after they have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3145	24:15	x1yd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	Paul is using the adjectives righteous and unrighteous as nouns to mean different groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of both people who have done what is right and people who have not done what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3146	24:16	a553		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτῳ	1	The pronoun this refers to what Paul has just said in verses 14 and 15 about what he believes. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Because I believe these things,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3147	24:16	va3b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	Paul is using this phrase to refer to the opinion or judgment of God and men by association with the way that they would assess anything that came to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3148	24:16	a554		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀνθρώπους	1	Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3149	24:17	p92m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Paul is using the word translated Now to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3150	24:17	lrs4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	παρεγενόμην	1	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3151	24:17	ryk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου	1	Paul is actually referring to the place where the people of the Jewish nation live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where my Jewish people live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3152	24:17	a555		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων & καὶ προσφοράς	1	By alms Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By offerings he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3153	24:18	a556		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐν αἷς	1	The pronoun which refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, ending verse 17 with a period. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3154	24:19	a557		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	τινὲς & ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς ἔδει & παρεῖναι	1	As Paul defends himself by telling what happened in Jerusalem, he suddenly realizes that his actual accusers are not present. So he breaks off his sentence to bring this fact to the attention of Governor Felix. If this might be unclear to your readers, in your translation you could finish this part of the story and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews from Asia saw me in Jerusalem with a Gentile and they thought that I had brought him into the temple. Now they ought to be present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3155	24:20	a558		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may these themselves say” or “these themselves should say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
3156	24:20	ag5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοὶ οὗτοι	1	These pronouns refer to the Jewish leaders who have come to Caesarea to accuse Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jewish leaders who have come here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3157	24:20	a559		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	στάντος μου ἐπὶ τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	Paul is referring to what he said to the Sanhedrin to defend himself by association with the way he stood in front of the council as he said it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I defended myself at a meeting of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3158	24:21	a560		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἢ περὶ μιᾶς ταύτης φωνῆς, ἧς ἐκέκραξα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἑστὼς, ὅτι περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν.	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “other than that when I was standing among them, I shouted that I was being judged by them that day concerning the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3159	24:21	ds1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because I believe that God will make those who have died alive again,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3160	24:21	d2lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι & ἐφ’ ὑμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3161	24:22	z5f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καταβῇ	1	Felix says may come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3162	24:23	a561		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδένα κωλύειν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle none and the negative verb forbid. Alternate translation: “to allow all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3163	24:23	a562		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἰδίων αὐτοῦ	1	By his own, Luke implicitly means Paul’s own friends. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of his friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3164	24:24	qy9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δρουσίλλῃ	1	The word Drusilla is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3165	24:24	xmq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ	1	The word Jewess is the name for a woman who is Jewish. Alternate translation: “who was a Jewish woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3166	24:25	a563		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3167	24:26	h4v7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul would give him money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3168	24:27	a564		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	διετίας & πληρωθείσης	1	Luke is describing this time period in the way in which his culture and language spoke about time. The expression can refer to any period of time between one year and two years in length. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “after a couple of years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3169	24:27	ur2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Πόρκιον Φῆστον	1	The words Porcius Festus are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3170	24:27	p59c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who were hostile to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3171	24:27	gln6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δεδεμένον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in bonds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3172	24:27	a566		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δεδεμένον	1	Luke is using one thing that the Romans did to keep Paul prisoner to represent all of what they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3173	25:intro	b6uk				0	Acts 25 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter Favor This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens; others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
3174	25:1	w8h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	οὖν	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3175	25:1	a567		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιβὰς	1	Luke is using one part of Festus, his foot, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Judea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having arrived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3176	25:1	a568		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ	1	By the province, Luke implicitly means the province of Judea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3177	25:1	zz4l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας	1	Luke says that Festus went up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3178	25:2	a569		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, first has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most prominent of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3179	25:3	w8um		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν	1	The pronoun him refers to Paul in each of these instances. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him … Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3180	25:3	pg8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐνέδραν ποιοῦντες ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	It was the Jewish leaders who were secretly making an ambush. This was not part of what they were requesting Festus to do. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But the Jewish leaders were secretly preparing an ambush to kill Paul along the way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3181	25:4	v5f9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ὁ & Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “Festus answered, ‘Paul is being held at Caesarea but I myself am about to depart soon’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3182	25:4	a570		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was holding Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3183	25:4	a571		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	Festus means implicitly that he is about to depart from Jerusalem and travel to Caesarea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to depart Jerusalem for Caesarea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3184	25:5	a54h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οἱ & ἐν ὑμῖν & δυνατοὶ	1	Festus is using the adjective powerful as a noun to mean a certain group of people. In this context, powerful means having the legal power to represent the Jewish nation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those of you who have legal standing in this matter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3185	25:5	a572		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	συνκαταβάντες	1	As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Festus says come down because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3186	25:5	nei6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they accuse him” or “they should accuse him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
3187	25:6	a573		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	ἡμέρας, οὐ πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “less than eight or ten days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3188	25:6	qv24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Festus sat in the judgment seat as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3189	25:6	j7c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his soldiers to bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3190	25:7	v4v8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν	1	The pronouns he and him refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3191	25:7	e7g2			πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα	1	It may be more natural in your language not to use the word and between these adjectives. Alternate translation: “many serious charges” or “many charges that were all serious”
3192	25:8	a574		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	εἰς Καίσαρά	1	Paul is using the leader of the Roman government to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3193	25:9	b49x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	Luke is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who were opposing Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3194	25:9	a575		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	Luke is speaking as if the Festus wanted to lay down a favor physically for the Jewish leaders, as if they would pick it up and leave something else for him in its place. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to do a favor for the Jewish leaders that they would later return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3195	25:9	l560		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς τῷ Παύλῳ εἶπεν	1	Together the words answering and said mean that Festus responded to Paul. Alternate translation: “Festus responded to Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
3196	25:9	qe8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς	1	Festus says gone up because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3197	25:9	wi2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα & ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem and have me judge you there about these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3198	25:10	u1ef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι	1	Paul is referring to Caesar’s authority to judge him by association with the judgment seat where Caesar sat when he judged cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by Caesar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3199	25:10	a576		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι	1	Paul is using Caesar, the leader of the Roman government, to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by the Roman government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3200	25:10	p78y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where it is necessary for someone to judge me”; or, if you translated the previous phrase as “I am being judged by the Roman government”: “which is the authority that ought to judge me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3201	25:11	l561		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb refuse. Alternate translation: “I am willing to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3202	25:12	t96z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ συμβουλίου	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by council here, he does not mean the Jewish Sanhedrin. He means the group of officials who advised Festus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3203	25:12	a577		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἐπὶ Καίσαρα πορεύσῃ	1	Festus is using a future statement to give a ruling in Paul’s case. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a ruling. Alternate translation: “so I grant your appeal and I am going to send you to Caesar for judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
3204	25:13	c3gc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word translated Now to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3205	25:13	q0sv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη	1	The word Agrippa is the name of a man. He ruled a few territories in the area where Festus was the Roman governor. The word Bernice is the name a woman. She was the sister of King Agrippa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3206	25:13	a578		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήντησαν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	Luke speaks of Agrippa and Bernice having come down to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem, where they lived. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3207	25:14	x8jf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Felix has left a certain man a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3208	25:14	a579		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος	1	Festus is using the phrase A certain man to introduce Paul to Agrippa and Bernice. If your language has its own way of introducing people and their stories, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “There is a man named Paul whom Felix left as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
3209	25:15	hyp5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requesting that I judge him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3210	25:16	l562		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ κατηγορούμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one against whom people are making accusations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3211	25:16	xjb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους	1	Here, the word face represents the presence of a person by association with the way people can see the face of someone who is present. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “may meet face to face with the accusers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3212	25:17	rm5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	συνελθόντων	1	The pronoun they refers to the chief priests and the elders of the Jews, whom Festus mentioned in verse 15. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the chief priests and the elders of the Jews had come together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3213	25:17	efe2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	Festus sat in the judgment seat as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that I was ready to act as the judge in this case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3214	25:17	hm6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I commanded soldiers to bring the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3215	25:19	d1qm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of religion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their religious beliefs” or “their beliefs about God and spiritual things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3216	25:20	l564		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked, ‘Might you be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things?’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3217	25:20	y9bv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κρίνεσθαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have me judge him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3218	25:21	ie7x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῦ & Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when Paul asked that I keep him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3219	25:21	l570		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ	1	Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “of His Majesty the Emperor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3220	25:21	ceq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I commanded the guards to keep him in custody” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3221	25:22	l565		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἐβουλόμην καὶ αὐτὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀκοῦσαι	1	Agrippa is using the reflexive pronoun myself for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I too would certainly want to hear this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
3222	25:22	l566			φησίν	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “he said”
3223	25:23	at4t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3224	25:24	l567		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	πάντες οἱ & ἄνδρες	1	Although the term men is masculine, Festus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. (It is clear that women as well as men are present, since Luke notes in verse 23 that Bernice entered with Agrippa.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3225	25:24	l571		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	By us, Festus means himself and King Agrippa but not the rest of the crowd to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3226	25:24	n8qj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐνέτυχόν μοι	1	Festus says the whole here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the multitude of the Jews petitioned me urgently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3227	25:24	l568		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	βοῶντες μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “shouting, ‘He ought not to live any longer!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3228	25:24	yv2q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he ought not to live no longer.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3229	25:25	g856		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to His Majesty The Empeor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3230	25:26	l569		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τῷ κυρίῳ	1	Festus is referring to the emperor by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to our lord the emperor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3231	25:26	fe2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	ὑμῶν & σοῦ	1	Here the first instance of you is plural and refers to everyone assembled in the hall. The second you is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. Use the plural and singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
3232	25:27	txs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἄλογον & μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ & σημᾶναι	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative adjective unreasonable. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me, sending a prisoner, that I should state” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3233	26:intro	e2q6				0	Acts 26 General Notes Structure and Formatting This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22) Paul told King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and said that the governor should not punish him for that. Special Concepts in this Chapter Light and darkness The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
3234	26:1	l573		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπιτρέπεταί σοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I permit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3235	26:1	wme6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα	1	This could mean: (1) that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (2) that as Paul spoke, he used hand gestures to emphasize the points he was making. Alternate translation: “gesturing with his hand as he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3236	26:2	mdq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the Jews accuse me of doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3237	26:2	cbr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαίων	1	Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3238	26:3	kns2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντων τῶν κατὰ Ἰουδαίους, ἐθῶν τε καὶ ζητημάτων	1	Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in a wide range of customs and controversies among the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3239	26:4	t8bg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	ἴσασι πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jews know very well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3240	26:4	x96h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου ἔν τε Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	By nation, Paul most likely means by association the people of his nation, that is, the Jews. Alternate translation: “among the Jews, especially in the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3241	26:5	y9a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας	1	By our, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3242	26:6	s9kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	νῦν	1	Paul is using the word translated Now to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3243	26:6	i9y5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἕστηκα κρινόμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3244	26:6	r42g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because I hope in the promise made to our fathers by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3245	26:6	l574		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3246	26:6	l575		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo	τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Since Paul explains in verse 8 that the promise for which he has hope is the resurrection from the dead, here you do not need to explain further what Paul means. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
3247	26:6	l576		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3248	26:6	l577		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	By our, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3249	26:7	hnf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν	1	Paul is referring to the people of Israel by association with the way that nation was historically composed of 12 tribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3250	26:7	l578		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν	1	By our, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3251	26:7	l579		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ & λατρεῦον	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of earnestness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serving earnestly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3252	26:7	kzg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν	1	Paul is using the two parts of a full day, night and day, to refer to continuous activity throughout a full day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually” or, if you translated serving in earnestness as “serving earnestly”: “and continually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3253	26:7	a580		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews are accusing me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3254	26:7	c4lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by these Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3255	26:8	de83		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει?	1	Paul is using the question form to challenge the Jewish leaders who are accusing him. Many of them are Pharisees who believe that God does raise the dead, and yet they do not believe that God raised Jesus from the dead. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “By accusing me, you are acting as if you do not believe that God raises the dead!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3256	26:8	l581		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular	παρ’ ὑμῖν	1	While to this point Paul has used the word you in the singular to refer to Agrippa, here he uses it in the plural to refer to the Jewish leaders who are present. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
3257	26:8	a599		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	Paul is speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility, but he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “that God raises the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
3258	26:8	ukk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	Here, raises the dead is an idiom that refers to making someone who has died alive again. Alternate translation: “God makes the dead alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3259	26:8	l582		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	νεκροὺς	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3260	26:9	r4df		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ	1	While in such contexts the word name often represents the person who has that name, Paul is describing a time when he did not believe that Jesus was still alive. So here the word name seems to represent the reputation and influence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the reputation and influence of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3261	26:10	b581		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῶν ἁγίων	1	Paul is using the term saints by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in 9:33. Alternate translation: “of the believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3262	26:10	b582		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν	1	Paul is using one part of the process of putting someone on trial for a capital offense and punishing that person if he is found guilty to represent the entire process. Since he speaks of casting his vote in favor of execution, here he means specifically the trial part of the process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when they were being put on trial for crimes with a penalty of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3263	26:10	nys7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Sanhedrin was considering whether to execute them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3264	26:10	l584		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατήνεγκα ψῆφον	1	The implication is that Paul cast his vote as a member of the Sanhedrin. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “as a member of the Sanhedrin, I cast my vote against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3265	26:11	b584		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	κατὰ πάσας τὰς συναγωγὰς & τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς	1	Paul says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “going from one synagogue to another to punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3266	26:12	ajp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς	1	This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word authority tells what kind of commission the chief priests gave Paul. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “with an authoritative commission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
3267	26:14	l585		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, calling me twice by name, asking me why I was persecuting him, and telling me it was hard for me to kick against a goad.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3268	26:14	sip5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με	1	Paul is speaking of this voice as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “I heard someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3269	26:14	du3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3270	26:14	zsi2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	The voice is speaking as if Paul were literally kicking against a goad, that is, a sharp object that people use to prod an animal. The voice means that by opposing Jesus and persecuting believers, Paul is hurting himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are hurting yourself by what you are doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3271	26:15	l586		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα, τίς εἶ, κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς, ὃν σὺ διώκεις	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I asked the Lord who he was, and the Lord said that he was Jesus, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3272	26:15	l587		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	τίς εἶ, κύριε	1	When Paul replied to the voice, he was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was Lord. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, in your translation you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3273	26:15	l588		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	ὁ & Κύριος εἶπεν	1	In this case Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3274	26:16	l589		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὤφθην σοι, προχειρίσασθαί σε ὑπηρέτην καὶ μάρτυρα, ὧν τε εἶδές με ὧν τε ὀφθήσομαί σοι	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He told me to get up and stand on my feet, because for this he had appeared to me, to appoint me a servant and a witness both of the things in which I had seen him and of the things in which he would be shown to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3275	26:16	a590		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου	1	It might seem that the expression get up and stand on your feet contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “stand up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
3276	26:16	a591		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὀφθήσομαί σοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will show myself to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3277	26:17	a592		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐξαιρούμενός σε ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἐθνῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω σε,	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He told me that he would rescue me from the peoples and from the Gentiles, to whom he was sending me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3278	26:17	a593		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ	1	By the people, Jesus means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3279	26:18	a594		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς, καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν, τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ κλῆρον ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3280	26:18	fk1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι	1	Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to understand the truth about him as if Paul would literally open the eyes of these people. Alternate translation: “to help them understand the truth about me so that they will turn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3281	26:18	gw8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς	1	Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to stop doing what is wrong and to start obeying God as if the Paul would be literally helping these people stop directing their attention to darkness and start directing it to light. Alternate translation: “so that they will stop doing what is wrong and start obeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3282	26:18	q3h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	By authority, Jesus implicitly means the control that Satan has over people who are under his authority. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and no longer have Satan control them but have God control them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3283	26:18	m65i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word forgiveness, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3284	26:18	m9ve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κλῆρον ἐν	1	Jesus is speaking of the blessings that he gives to those who believe in him as if they were an inheritance such as children receive from their parents. Alternate translation: “the blessings that I give to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3285	26:18	c5ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom I sanctify because they have faith in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3286	26:19	zv2u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative adjective disobedient. Alternate translation: “I was obedient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3287	26:19	sn4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	Paul is referring to Jesus by association with the way Jesus spoke to him in this vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus, who spoke to me from heaven in this vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3288	26:20	fei4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	Paul is speaking as if he declared that people should physically turn to God. He means that he proclaimed they should stop living in one way and begin to live in another way. Alternate translation: “start obeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3289	26:20	h1v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word repentance, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “doing deeds that showed that they had truly repented” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3290	26:21	tl6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who opposed me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3291	26:22	t8f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ	1	Paul is referring to people of every kind by naming two extremes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to people of every kind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3292	26:22	f6py		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς & ὧν	1	If it would appear in your language that Paul was contradicting himself by saying that he spoke nothing and then describing what he spoke, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the same things that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
3293	26:23	pe9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	Paul could be saying that this is what Moses and the prophets said about the Messiah. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They addressed the question as to whether the Christ would be a sufferer, as to whether he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3294	26:23	l597		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	Paul could be speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility even though he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now since the Christ was a sufferer, since he was the first from the resurrection of the dead, then he was going to proclaim light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
3295	26:23	p9t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the first person whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3296	26:23	sc5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	νεκρῶν	1	Paul is using the adjective dead as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of people who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3297	26:23	z2ms		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	Paul is saying that the truth that Jesus proclaimed about God was like a light that allowed people to see. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was going to proclaim the truth about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3298	26:23	a595		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ & λαῷ	1	By the people, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3299	26:24	a596			ὁ Φῆστος & φησιν	1	To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Festus said”
3300	26:24	tk27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει	1	Festus is speaking of learning as if it were a living thing that was turning Paul from sanity to insanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have become insane from learning so much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3301	26:25	dur9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μαίνομαι	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative adjective insane. Alternate translation: “I am completely sane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3302	26:25	a6pb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	κράτιστε Φῆστε	1	The expression most excellent was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in Acts 23:26. Alternate translation: “Honorable Governor Festus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3303	26:25	a597		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession	ἀληθείας καὶ σωφροσύνης ῥήματα	1	Paul is using the possessive form to describe the character of the words he is speaking. Alternate translation: “words that are true and sane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3304	26:26	cs7b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness	πρὸς ὃν καὶ παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ	1	Paul recognizes that he is being very outspoken in response to King Agrippa’s invitation to speak for himself, so he implicitly apologizes. In your translation, you could use a comparable expression from your language and culture. Alternate translation: “and I hope that he will pardon me for speaking so boldly as I talk to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
3305	26:26	tta8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ πείθομαι οὐθέν	1	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “I am not persuaded that not any of these things eludes him.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am persuaded that not one of these things at all eludes him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3306	26:26	v1uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this did not happen in a corner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3307	26:26	xqr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	1	Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this has been done openly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3308	26:26	i5wg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν γωνίᾳ	1	Paul is speaking as if Jesus might have done things secretly, as if he had done them in a corner of a room where no one could see him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “secretly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3309	26:27	a4a2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις?	1	Paul asks this question to challenge King Agrippa to recognize that if he believes what the prophets wrote, then he should believe that Jesus rose from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should believe what I am saying about Jesus since you believe the prophets, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3310	26:28	y8qq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι?	1	Agrippa is using the question form to challenge Paul. He is asserting that what Paul has said so far is not sufficiently persuasive. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. The term little could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian with so little proof.” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian in such a short time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3311	26:29	a598			καὶ ἐν ὀλίγῳ καὶ ἐν μεγάλῳ	1	The term little could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “whether what I have said is enough or whether you need more proof” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “whether it takes a short time or a long time”
3312	26:29	k7kq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων	1	Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the chains that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3313	26:31	blz8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	The king and governor are referring to a penalty of death by association with death itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to receive the death penalty or to be kept in chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3314	26:31	dwyb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	δεσμῶν	1	These people who heard Paul speak are using one aspect of imprisonment, the chains that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3315	26:32	n293		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You could have released this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3316	27:intro	r82x				0	Acts 27 General Notes Special Concepts in this Chapter Sailing People who lived near the sea traveled by boats powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible. Trust Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailors and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]]) Paul breaks bread Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
3317	27:1	b2yz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities decided that we should sail” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3318	27:1	l604		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says us because he joined Paul at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3319	27:1	a600		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	As the General Notes to this chapter explain, here and in several other places Luke says “we,” us, and “our” to mean himself and others who were traveling with him, but not his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3320	27:1	s6ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ	1	Luke is using the phrase a centurion to introduce Julius as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
3321	27:1	un2s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰουλίῳ	1	The word Julius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3322	27:1	d22f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	The Augustan regiment was the name of the military unit from which this centurion came. Some versions translate this as the “Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3323	27:2	efe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1	The word ** Adramyttium ** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3324	27:2	dnr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πλοίῳ & μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was about to do by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was about to sail it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3325	27:2	h3uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀριστάρχου	1	The word Aristarchus is the name of a man who came from Macedonia but who had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in 19:29. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3326	27:3	a602		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατήχθημεν εἰς Σιδῶνα	1	As the General Notes to this chapter explain, Luke says that he and the other travelers came down to Sidon because that was the customary way in this culture of describing people arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Sidon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3327	27:3	rp73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of care, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could care for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3328	27:4	mjt8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον	1	The expression sailed under does not mean that the travelers sailed south of the island of Cyprus, such as Luke describes in 21:3, even though that would have been the shortest route. Rather, sailed under means that the ship kept close to the northern shore of the island, which loomed above the ship and blocked the wind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we stayed close to the northern shore of Cyprus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3329	27:5	y6m6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the travelers got off the ship at Myra. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we came down to Myra of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3330	27:5	ni2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας	1	The word Myra is the name of a city, and the word Lycia is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3331	27:6	j4cf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was doing by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was sailing it to Italy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3332	27:6	fdq2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρῖνον	1	The word Alexandrian is the name for someone or something that comes from the city of Alexandria. See how you translated it in 18:24. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3333	27:7	zzw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἱκαναῖς δὲ ἡμέραις, βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the ship was sailing slowly and with difficulty because it was sailing into the wind. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus because we were sailing into the wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3334	27:7	pye5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Κνίδον	1	The word Cnidus is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3335	27:7	mq4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Κρήτην & Σαλμώνην	1	The word Crete is the name of an island. See how you translated the word “Cretans” in 2:11. The word Salmone is the name of a cape on the east end of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3336	27:8	b604		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν	1	The pronoun it refers the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing along the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3337	27:8	p4ri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μόλις	1	The implication is that even under the shelter of the island of Crete, the winds were still so strong as to make sailing to the west difficult. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with difficulty because the winds from the west were strong even there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3338	27:8	a64y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Καλοὺς Λιμένας	1	The word Fair Havens is the name of a port on the south coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3339	27:8	n7re		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	πόλις ἦν Λασαία	1	The word Lasea is the name of a city on the coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3340	27:9	a605		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that after this fast, which came in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even the fast had already passed and so there was a higher risk of seasonal storms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3341	27:9	u6x5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν νηστείαν	1	Luke is referring to the Day of Atonement by association with the way that Jews observed a fast in connection with that sacred day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Day of Atonement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3342	27:9	a606		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρῄνει ὁ Παῦλος	1	The pronoun them refers to the centurion and to the pilot and owner of the ship, as verse 11 makes clear. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was warning Julius and the pilot and the owner of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3343	27:10	p29v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θεωρῶ	1	Paul is speaking as if he could literally see the things he describes. He means that God has revealed them to him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has revealed to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3344	27:10	nx9c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of injury and loss, you could express the same ideas in other ways. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “on this voyage, many of us will be injured and we will lose many valuable things. We will not only lose the cargo and the ship, we will lose our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3345	27:11	b1kz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ & ἑκατοντάρχης τῷ κυβερνήτῃ καὶ τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μᾶλλον ἐπείθετο, ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the pilot and the captain were persuading the centurion more by what they were saying than Paul was persuading him by what he was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3346	27:11	a607		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ ναυκλήρῳ	1	Here the word captain could mean: (1) someone who was in command of the ship. Alternate translation: “the ship’s commander” (2) someone who owned the ship and was in command of it. However, while this is a common meaning of the word, it is unlikely in this context. We learn from the story that this ship was carrying grain from Egypt to Italy and so it would have belonged to the emperor’s own fleet. Alternate translation: “the shipowner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3347	27:12	jmi3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	λιμένος	1	A harbor is a place on the coast whose location and shape allow ships to come safely close to the land. If your language does not have a term for such a place, you could use a general description in your translation. Alternate translation: “place of access to the shore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3348	27:12	z1lf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	παραχειμασίαν & παραχειμάσαι	1	The terms wintering and to winter mean to stay in a place that is safe during the winter, which is a cold and stormy season in this location. If the seasons do not vary much in your location or if there is not a cold and stormy season, you could explain this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “staying during a cold and stormy season … to stay there during the cold and stormy season” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3349	27:12	k2ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοίνικα	1	The word Phoenix is the name of a port city on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3350	27:12	a608		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	This expression means that the Phoenix harbor provided access for ships to sail out in the directions that the winds coming from the southwest and the northwest blew. That is, ships would sail out to the northeast and southeast from the harbor, and they would enter the harbor from the northeast or southeast. Your language and culture may have a comparable expression of its own that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could describe this in general terms. Alternate translation: “looking down the northwest wind and down the southwest wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3351	27:12	x6vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	Luke is speaking as if the harbor of Phoenix was literally looking in these directions. He means that it gave access for ships to sail in those directions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “giving access for sailing to the northeast or to the southeast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3352	27:12	gyd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	λίβα & χῶρον	1	These directions are based on the rising and setting of the sun. The southwest is somewhat to the left of the setting sun, and the northwest is somewhat to the right of the setting sun. If you decide to use the terms “northeast” and “southeast” instead, based on the two previous notes, the northeast is somewhat to the left of the rising sun and the southeast is somewhat to the right of the rising sun. Your language and culture may have their own terms for these directions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3353	27:13	xx67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἄραντες	1	An anchor is a heavy object that is attached to a rope that is tied to a ship. The ship’s crew tosses the anchor into the water and it sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. The crew raises the anchor out of the water when it is time for the ship to travel. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. Alternate translation: “having weighed anchor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3354	27:13	a603		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	παρελέγοντο	1	The pronoun they refers to the crew of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the crew was sailing the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3355	27:14	m2xe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	μετ’ οὐ πολὺ	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “after a short time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3356	27:14	g1ek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate	ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων	1	The term Euraklyon is a combination of the Greek word for the east wind and the Latin word for the north wind. Luke spells out the term using Greek letters so that his readers will know how it sounds. This seems to be the name that Luke heard the sailors give to this wind. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also say what it means. Alternate translation: “called the Northeaster” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
3357	27:14	lrs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ καλούμενος	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the sailors called” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3358	27:14	tz2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῆς	1	The pronoun it refers to the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3359	27:15	a609		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the wind seized the ship, so that we were not able to face into the wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3360	27:15	a610		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	συναρπασθέντος & τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	Luke is speaking of the wind as if it were a living thing that seized the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the wind blowing with such force that it kept the ship from sailing in the direction from which it was coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3361	27:15	a611		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	Luke is speaking as if the ship literally had a face that it could turn towards the wind. Your language may have an expression that suits this context and that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to bear up against the wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3362	27:15	w1hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφερόμεθα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind drove us along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3363	27:16	c4cg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες, καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	The expression running under is a sailing term that means to go along a specific side of some land in order to block the wind. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “sailing under the lee of a certain island called Cauda” or “sailing on the side of an island called Cauda where the wind was not so strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3364	27:16	a612		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	νησίον & τι & καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a certain island that people called Cauda” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3365	27:16	aq56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Καῦδα	1	The word Cauda is the name of a small island located off the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3366	27:16	h9z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τῆς σκάφης	1	A lifeboat is a smaller boat that crews sometimes tow behind their larger ship and sometimes bring up onto the ship and tie down. They use the smaller boat for various reasons, including escaping from the larger ship if it is sinking. If your language does not have a term for a smaller boat like this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the smaller utility boat that the ship was towing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3367	27:17	tx1f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον	1	The word helps is a nautical term that means ropes or cables. The word undergirding describes the process of running ropes or cables around the bottom of a ship so that the ship will not come apart during a storm. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were tying ropes around the bottom of the ship so that it would not come apart during the storm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3368	27:17	a613		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐχρῶντο	1	Here and in the next two verses, the pronoun they refers to the sailors of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were using” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3369	27:17	a614		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μὴ εἰς τὴν Σύρτιν ἐκπέσωσιν	1	The expression fall into is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship becoming stuck in quicksand. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they might run aground on the Syrtis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3370	27:17	dvv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	The word Syrtis is the name of a large mass of quicksand near the north coast of Africa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3371	27:17	l615		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	Quicksand, which the word Syrtis describes, is sand that is saturated with water. It does not support the weight of a person, so sailors cannot get out of a ship to free it if the ship gets stuck in quicksand. If your readers would not be familiar with quicksand, you could describe it generally in your translation. Alternate translation: “the large mass of waterlogged sand off the north coast of Africa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3372	27:17	l8kl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος	1	The term gear could mean: (1) the sails of the ship and the rigging that the sailors uses to raise and lower the sails. If this is the meaning, then Luke is saying that without sails, the sailors could not steer the ship and it had to go wherever the wind drove it. Alternate translation: “taking down the sails” (2) a sea anchor, that is, some object that the sailors would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow the ship down. If this is the meaning, then the sailors lowered this sea anchor in the hopes that the storm would end before they reached the quicksand. Alternate translation: “putting a sea anchor into the water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3373	27:17	g7rw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐφέροντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was driving them along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3374	27:18	fx4m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σφοδρῶς & χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was tossing us exceedingly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3375	27:18	nd5h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο	1	The word jettison is a nautical term that describes sailors throwing the cargo of a ship (the goods that the ship is transporting) into the sea to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent it from sinking. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were throwing the cargo of the ship into the sea to make the ship lighter to try to keep it from sinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3376	27:19	l617		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τῇ τρίτῃ	1	In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” So here, the third day means two days after the sailors tied ropes around the ship and one day after the sailors threw the cargo overboard. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “on the day after that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3377	27:19	a641		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τῇ τρίτῃ	1	If you retain this idiom but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3378	27:19	vm2k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sailors threw the equipment … overboard in a desperate effort to make the ship even lighter. In this context, equipment refers to everything the sailors needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates that they had given up on sailing the ship and were hoping just to survive. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they became so desperate that they threw overboard everything they needed to sail the ship, hoping just to survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3379	27:19	l616		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	αὐτόχειρες	1	Luke is using one part of the sailors, their hands, to represent all of them in the act of throwing the cargo overboard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3380	27:20	if7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μήτε & ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sun and stars did not appear because the dark storm clouds obscured them. Luke also assumes that his readers will understand that sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and in what direction they were headed. So this is a further indication of how desperate the situation was. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “since the sailors could not determine their position or nagivate the ship because the dark storm clouds prevented the sun and stars from appearing for many days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3381	27:20	p2wd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	χειμῶνός & οὐκ ὀλίγου	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great storm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3382	27:20	lrs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐπικειμένου	1	Luke is speaking of the storm as if they were a living thing that was lying upon the ship. He means that the storm continued to buffet the ship without ever letting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continually buffeting the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3383	27:20	mnj5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the same ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we finally lost all hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3384	27:20	l618		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we finally stopped hoping that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3385	27:20	l619		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it finally became very difficult to hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3386	27:21	d1le		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πολλῆς & ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of abstinence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as we had gone a long time without eating food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3387	27:21	zns2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	σταθεὶς & ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	Paul stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of them to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3388	27:21	bc1x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν	1	The terms injury and loss mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “such a great loss” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3389	27:22	djh4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἀποβολὴ & ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν, πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου	1	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there will be no loss of life among you, there will only be loss of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3390	27:23	a620		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὗ εἰμι, ᾧ καὶ λατρεύω	1	The phrases whose I am and whom I serve mean similar things. Paul is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the God I worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3391	27:24	a621		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, μὴ φοβοῦ, Παῦλε; Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι, καὶ ἰδοὺ, κεχάρισταί σοι ὁ Θεὸς πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The angel told me that I should not be afraid, because it was necessary for me to stand before Caesar, and behold, God had graciously granted to me all the ones sailing with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3392	27:24	a622		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	The angel is using the term behold to focus Paul’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3393	27:24	z1j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι	1	The angel is using one aspect of the trial process, the fact that an accused person would stand before a judge, to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must appear in Caesar’s court so that he can judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3394	27:25	r9t8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way the angel told me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3395	27:26	vmp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς νῆσον & τινα & ἐκπεσεῖν	1	The expression fall upon is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on the shore of an island. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “to run aground on some island” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3396	27:27	rrm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “night 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3397	27:27	la7u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαφερομένων ἡμῶν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was driving us about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3398	27:27	afs6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ	1	The word Hadria is the term that people of this culture used to describe the open Mediterranean Sea between Italy and Malta on the west and Greece and Crete on the east. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3399	27:27	a623		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	προσάγειν τινὰ αὐτοῖς χώραν	1	Luke is speaking of this land as if it were a living thing that was approaching the sailors on the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were approaching some land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3400	27:28	ruj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	βολίσαντες	1	The expression taking soundings is a nautical term that describes sailors determining the depth of the water. Sailors measure this by dropping a marked line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3401	27:28	tq53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι & ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε	1	A fathom is a unit of measurement of the depth of water. One fathom is equal to about two meters or about six feet. Alternate translation: “40 meters … 30 meters” or “120 feet … 90 feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3402	27:29	a624		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατὰ & ἐκπέσωμεν	1	The expression fall upon is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on some rugged place. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “we might run aground on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3403	27:29	q4am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρύμνης	1	The word stern is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3404	27:30	rr89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρῴρης	1	The word bow is a nautical term that means the front of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the front of the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3405	27:31	sz8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to save yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3406	27:32	a625		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκπεσεῖν	1	The expression fall away is a nautical term that in this context could mean: (1) that the soldiers let the lifeboat fall into the water where none of the sailors could get into it, because it was no longer tied to the ship. Alternate translation: “fall into the water” (2) that the soldiers let the lifeboat, which was already in the water, drift away where none of the sailors could get into it. Alternate translation: “drift away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3407	27:33	j5yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν, προσδοκῶντες & διατελεῖτε	1	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “This is now day 14 that you have been anxiously waiting, and you are continuing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3408	27:33	a626		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἄσιτοι & μηθὲν προσλαβόμενοι	1	The expressions fasting and having eaten nothing mean similar things. Paul is using the two expressions together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to eat nothing at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3409	27:34	a627		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο & πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this will save you” or “this will keep you alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3410	27:34	j3qx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	οὐδενὸς & ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται	1	Paul is using one part of each of his listeners, a hair from his head, to represent all of that listener. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of you will survive without suffering harm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3411	27:36	zt9q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὔθυμοι & γενόμενοι πάντες	1	The phrase were … encouraged is not actually a passive form in Greek. The word translated encouraged is an adjective. However, this phrase might sound like a passive verbal form in other langauges. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this encouraged them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3412	27:37	ynq3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	ἤμεθα & αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ	1	This is background information about the number of people on the ship. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3413	27:37	a628		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	αἱ & ψυχαὶ	1	Luke is using one part of the people on the ship, their souls, to represent their entire selves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3414	27:38	a629		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κορεσθέντες & τροφῆς	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having eaten enough food to satisfy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3415	27:39	a643		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον	1	Here and in the rest of this verse and in the next verse, the pronoun they refers to the sailors. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were not recognizing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3416	27:39	vdk2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	κόλπον & τινα	1	A bay is a large area of water that partly surrounded by land but open to a larger body of water. Your language may have a specific expression for this kind of area. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “a certain area of water sheltered by the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3417	27:40	ntr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων	1	The words bands and rudders are nautical terms. The rudders were large pieces of wood at the back of the ship that the sailors used for steering the ship. The bands were ropes or cords that held the rudders out of the water while anchors were holding the ship in one place. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the ropes that held out of the water the pieces of wood that the sailors used to steer the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3418	27:40	cn2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	τὸν ἀρτέμωνα	1	A sail is a large piece of cloth that catches the wind in order to propel a ship through the water. A topsail is a sail that sailors place at the top of a mast on a ship. A mast is a vertical pole with cross-poles that hold sails. Alternate translation: “the sail that sailors put at the top of a pole, high above the ship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3419	27:40	pa1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν	1	In this context, the expression they were heading is a nautical term that describes a ship moving in a specific direction. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were steering the ship toward the beach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3420	27:41	a630		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	περιπεσόντες & εἰς	1	The expression having fallen into is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship striking land. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “striking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3421	27:41	y22n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τόπον διθάλασσον	1	The expression a place between two seas is a nautical term that describes a sandbar that extends out from the land. A sandbar forms when a sea current coming from one direction flows across a sea current coming from another direction. This causes the sand under the water to pile up, making the water shallow and dangerous for ships. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “a sandbar extending out from the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3422	27:41	a631		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἡ δὲ πρύμνα ἐλύετο ὑπὸ τῆς βίας	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the violence was breaking up the stern” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3423	27:41	a632		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τῆς βίας	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is referring to the violence of the waves that were hitting the stern of the ship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by the violence of the waves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3424	27:41	a634		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὸ τῆς βίας	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of violence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the waves that were hitting it were so strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3425	27:44	a644		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς	1	Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the rest to depart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3426	28:intro	w8yn				0	Acts 28 General Notes Structure and Formatting No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years. Special Concepts in this Chapter “Letters” and “brothers” The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming. When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians. Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter “He was a god” The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
3427	28:1	j1yf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διασωθέντες	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it seems that Luke means to say that it was God. Alternate translation: “after God had brought us safely through” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3428	28:1	a635		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the island Malta” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3429	28:1	f8y4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μελίτη	1	The word Malta is the name of an island located south of the island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3430	28:2	e7w6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	οἵ & βάρβαροι	1	Luke is using the word barbarians in the specific sense that it had in his culture. He means people who did not speak Greek or Latin. From his perspective and the perspective of the others with him, they were “foreigners,” but from their own perspectives, they were “natives” of the island. It may be appropriate to describe them that way in your translation. Alternate translation: “the natives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3431	28:2	r7jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν	1	Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary benevolence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3432	28:3	g4ad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἔχιδνα	1	A viper is a dangerous poisonous snake. If your readers would not recognize this name, you could use the name of another poisonous snake they might recognize or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a snake whose venom was poisonous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3433	28:4	ma1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	ἡ δίκη	1	The word Justice is the name of a false god who the people of this time believed would avenge crimes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3434	28:6	m11i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	αὐτὸν μέλλειν πίμπρασθαι, ἢ καταπίπτειν ἄφνω νεκρόν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the effects of the venom would begin to inflame him or that he would suddenly fall down dead” or “that the effects of the venom would make his body start to swell or that he would suddenly fall down dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3435	28:6	i6i6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle nothing and the negative adjective unusual. Alternate translation: “everything happening to him as usual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3436	28:6	u81u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μεταβαλόμενοι	1	Luke is speaking as if the natives of Malta were literally turning themselves around. He means that they came to a different opinion about who Paul was. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression from your own language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “changing their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3437	28:6	cfe9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘He is a god!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3438	28:7	r95r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	δὲ	1	Luke is using the word Now to introduce background information about Publius that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3439	28:7	wx6t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῷ πρώτῳ	1	Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular kind of person. In this context, first has the sense of most prominent. Since Publius is a Roman name, this man was probably the Roman governor of the island. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of the most prominent man” or “of the Roman governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3440	28:7	wh2d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ποπλίῳ	1	The word Publius is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3441	28:8	m154		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom fevers and dysentery were afflicting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3442	28:8	fr46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	δυσεντερίῳ	1	The word dysentery describes an infectious intestinal disease. In your translation, you could use a term a similar disease, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “intestinal disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3443	28:9	yk6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐθεραπεύοντο	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was healing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3444	28:10	ydg4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς	1	Luke assumes that his readers will understand that these honors probably included gifts. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “gave us many gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3445	28:11	jc5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι	1	The word Dioscouri is the name of two false gods, Castor and Pollux, whom some sailors considered to be their patron gods. The name means “Sons of Zeus” in Greek. Alternate translation: “with Castor and Pollux as their figurehead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3446	28:11	a636		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι	1	A figurehead was an image of a god, human being, animal, or object that was painted or sculpted on the prow (front) of a ship as a good luck token. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “with images of Castor and Pollux sculpted on the prow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3447	28:12	a637		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	καταχθέντες εἰς Συρακούσας	1	Luke says that he and the others traveling with him had come down to Syracuse because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed at Syracuse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3448	28:12	w5c6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Συρακούσας	1	The word Syracuse is the name of a city on the southeast coast of the island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3449	28:13	a638		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	κατηντήσαμεν εἰς Ῥήγιον	1	Luke says that he and those traveling with him came down to Rhegium because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Rhegium” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3450	28:13	z2u4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ῥήγιον	1	The word Rhegium is the name of a port city that was located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3451	28:13	tz4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ποτιόλους	1	The word Puteoli is the name of a city that was located on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3452	28:14	m1is		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοὺς	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3453	28:14	a2c5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθημεν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3454	28:14	bc3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go	οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν	1	Since Luke describes in the next verse how believers from Rome came some distance to meet Paul and his companions on their way to Rome, by thus he means that after staying with the believers in Puetoli for seven days, they continued on their way to Rome. In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of went. Alternate translation: “we came near Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3455	28:15	a639		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κἀκεῖθεν	1	By there, Luke implicitly means Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “From Rome” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3456	28:15	a640		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	Luke is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3457	28:15	k754		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	The implication is that these believers had heard from the believers in Puteoli while Paul and his companions were staying with them that they were on their way to Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having learned from the believers in Puteoli that we were coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3458	28:15	m9tz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔλαβε θάρσος	1	Here, courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: “became encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3459	28:15	se8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀππίου Φόρου & Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν	1	The phrase the Forum of Appius is the name of a popular market on the main highway to Rome that was called the Appian Way. The Forum of Appius was about 40 miles or about 60 kilometers south of Rome. The phrase Three Taverns is the name of an inn on that same highway about 30 miles or about 45 kilometers south of Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3460	28:16	te8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman officials allowed Paul” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3461	28:16	a642		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθ’ ἑαυτὸν	1	Since there was a soldier with Paul who was guarding him, Luke does not mean that Paul stayed all by himself. Rather, he means that the Roman authorities allowed Paul to live in a rented house (as verse 30 indicates) rather than putting him in prison. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in a rented house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3462	28:17	vf7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3463	28:17	d77z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους	1	Luke is using the adjective first as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, first has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “most prominent among the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3464	28:17	e1dd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3465	28:17	a615		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Paul is using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3466	28:17	a664		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔθεσι τοῖς πατρῴοις	1	Paul is using the term fathers’ to describe customs that have been passed down among the Jews through the generations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ancestral customs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3467	28:17	g55i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῷ λαῷ	1	By the people, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3468	28:17	hgk4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐγώ & δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem delivered me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3469	28:17	x3r2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰς χεῖρας	1	Here, hands represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the custody” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3470	28:18	fed7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί	1	Paul is referring to a penalty of death by association with death itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to deserve the death penalty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3471	28:19	lr96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	Paul is using the name of a whole group, the Jews, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3472	28:19	n6vf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἠναγκάσθην	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my concern for my safety forced me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3473	28:19	e7gr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῦ ἔθνους μου	1	Paul is referring by association to the people of the Jewish nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3474	28:20	a616		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what Israel is hoping for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3475	28:20	b1fd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἵνεκεν & τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	Paul is referring by association to something that the people of Israel had hope for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) the hope that God would send the Messiah. Alternate translation: “because I believe God has sent the Messiah” (2) the hope that God would make people who had died alive again. Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will make people who have died alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3476	28:20	n3s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	Paul is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3477	28:20	a617		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this chain is binding me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3478	28:20	pgr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the chain with which he is bound, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Romans are keeping me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3479	28:21	x5d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	By We, these Jewish leaders mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3480	28:21	y4bx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	These Jewish leaders are using the term brothers to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3481	28:21	a618		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἀπήγγειλεν ἢ ἐλάλησέν τι	1	The terms reported and said mean similar things. The Jewish leaders are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “nor have any of the brothers, coming, told us anything at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3482	28:22	gy8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3483	28:22	j12v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀντιλέγεται	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people speak against it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3484	28:22	a619		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πανταχοῦ	1	The Jewish leaders say everywhere here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in places throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3485	28:23	a645		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	πλείονες	1	Luke is using the adjective more as a noun to mean the larger number of people who came to hear Paul speak. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “more people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3486	28:23	dg5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “testifying about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3487	28:23	peu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ἀπό τε τοῦ νόμου Μωϋσέως, καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	Luke is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming two of their major parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from passages throughout the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3488	28:24	pmd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οἱ & ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying convinced some” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3489	28:25	n7pm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	εἰπόντος & ῥῆμα ἓν	1	Luke is using the term word to mean a statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made this last statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3490	28:25	a646		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	Paul is using the term fathers to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3491	28:26	qj7q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation inside the first one. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to go to the people of Israel and tell them that by hearing they would hear but they would not understand at all and that seeing they would see but they would not perceive at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3492	28:26	a647		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	λέγων, πορεύθητι	1	This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3493	28:26	a648		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ	1	This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3494	28:26	pax8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε & βλέποντες βλέψετε	1	Isaiah is using a Hebrew idiom, the repetition of a verb to express the intensity of an action. It may not be possible to translate this Hebrew practice of verb repetition directly into many languages. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb in your language. Alternate translation: “You will try very hard to hear … you will try very hard to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3495	28:26	a649		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You will become aware of what is happening around you but you will not understand the significance of what is happening” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3496	28:26	s1ti		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε & καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3497	28:26	a650		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	This is the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with a closing third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3498	28:27	fz42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν, μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν, καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to say that because the heart of that people had been thickened, and with their ears they had hardly heard, and they had shut their eyes. Otherwise they might have seen with their eyes, and they might have heard with their ears, and they might have understood with their heart and turned back, and God would have healed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3499	28:27	a651		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	These three phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “For this people is stubbornly refusing to use its senses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3500	28:27	ts5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπαχύνθη & ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	Isaiah is speaking as if the heart of the people of Israel has literally been thickened. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3501	28:27	a652		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία	1	Isaiah is speaking as if the heart of the people of Israel has literally been thickened. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3502	28:27	a653			ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one heart, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts of these people”
3503	28:27	ngve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία & τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	Here, the heart represents the thoughts of people. Alternate translation: “the thinking … with their thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3504	28:27	a654		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐπαχύνθη	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has become thick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3505	28:27	f5m4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	Isaiah is speaking as if the people of Israel have become unable to hear and have shut their eyes so that they will not see. He means that they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3506	28:27	a655		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo	τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν & ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς & τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν	1	It might seem that these expressions contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten them. Alternate translation: “they have hardly heard anything … they might see clearly … they might hear clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
3507	28:27	a656		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν	1	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they might use their senses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3508	28:27	q8c2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	Isaiah is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3509	28:27	vb9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	This does not mean God would only heal the people physically. He would also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. Alternate translation: “I would heal them and forgive them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3510	28:27	a657		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	This is the end of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with closing second-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3511	28:28	a658		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p	γνωστὸν & ἔστω	1	If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
3512	28:28	e8hb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who has done the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent me to proclaim this salvation of his to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3513	28:28	b2za		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3514	28:28	d18n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	αὐτοὶ & ἀκούσονται	1	In this context the word hear likely means “understand and obey,” since Paul is drawing a contrast with the stubborn response of many of the Jews. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they will understand the message and obey it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3515	28:29	a659		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants		0	As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3516	28:30	c56e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory	ἐνέμεινεν δὲ διετίαν ὅλην ἐν ἰδίῳ μισθώματι	1	This is the beginning of information that Luke presents to bring the story of the book of Acts to a close. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
3517	28:30	a660		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	ἐνέμεινεν	1	The pronoun he refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul stayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3518	28:31	wv1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a kingdom, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3519	28:31	a661		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας ἀκωλύτως	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of boldness and hindrance, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “very boldly, with no one hindering him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3520	28:31	a662		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας	1	Luke says all here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])